JP2021164756A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: first-class ball entry means allowing entry of game balls to trigger a variation in a first pattern; second-class ball entry means allowing entry of game balls to trigger a variation in a second pattern; and control means for controlling a ball entry relative ration between the number of game balls entering the first-class ball entry means and the number of game balls entering the second-class ball entry means per unit time so as to be changeable at least in three stages when game balls are circulated in a circulation mode most advantageous to a player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, the structure, control, etc. are used for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and simplifying the structure. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-172988

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, providing a sounder game, and the like. Improvement of technology is desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following forms.

[Form] (This form is mainly based on the second embodiment below)
Type 1 ball entry means, in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol,
Type 2 ball entry means, in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the second symbol,
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the number of the game balls entering the first-class ball-entry means and the game balls to the second-class ball-entry means per unit time. A control means for controlling the relative ratio of the ball to the number of balls, which is the relative ratio of the ball to the number of balls, in at least three stages.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine of the above-described form, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variable-displayed in the liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing explaining the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of a voice light emission control device and a display control device. It is a perspective view which shows the 1st start port and its surroundings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pair of nails and the 1st start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the conventional example. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pair of nails and the 1st start port provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pair of nails and the 1st start port provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pair of nails and the 1st start port provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pair of nails and the 1st start port provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pair of nails and the 1st start port provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 5. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pair of nails and the 1st start port provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 6. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pair of nails and the 1st start port provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 7. It is a perspective view which shows the pair of nails and the 1st start port provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 8. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a pair of nails and a first starting port provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 9. It is a perspective view which disassembled the 1st start port in the modification 9. It is a perspective view which shows the electric accessory and its periphery provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 10. It is a perspective view which shows the electric accessory which is provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 11 and its periphery. It is a front view which shows the 1st movable piece of the electric accessory provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 12. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board 30. It is explanatory drawing explaining the distribution mechanism 120. It is explanatory drawing explaining the ordinary electric accessory 53. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol which is variable display in the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display surface 41a. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine 10. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for the 1st start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the hit / fail table for a 2nd start port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning / failing table (the winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery. It is explanatory drawing explaining the kind of support mode which a pachinko machine 10 can execute. It is explanatory drawing explaining the mode in which a game ball is distributed at the time of execution of a low frequency support mode. It is explanatory drawing explaining the mode in which a game ball is distributed at the time of execution of a high frequency support mode A. It is explanatory drawing explaining the mode in which a game ball is distributed at the time of execution of a high frequency support mode B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in pachinko machine 10. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a start port. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot / reach information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for thru. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation time. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of the voice light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed in MPU 92 of a voice light emission control apparatus 90. It is a flowchart which shows the state memory processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for support mode production. It is a flowchart which shows the process for game times production. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU 102 of a display control apparatus 100. It is a flowchart which shows the command interrupt processing which is executed in MPU 102 of a display control apparatus 100. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed in MPU 102 of a display control apparatus 100. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 ordinary electric accessory 53 and each start port in modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 ordinary electric accessory 53 and each start port in a modification 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in the modification 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each start port in a modification 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each start port in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in modification 4. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each start port in the modification 5. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in modification 5. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in modification 5. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each start port in the modification 6. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 6. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in the modification 6. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the structure of the ordinary electric accessory 53.

Embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First Embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Application to other configurations:
D. About the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments:

A. First Embodiment:
A1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the first embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 that is combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a big hit is won, when a reach occurs, or the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. There is provided with a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation operation by the change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”). When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing intensity as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player launches the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26 by operating the game ball launch button 26 after turning on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays images for design and production.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out the prize balls. When an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 launches a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope connected below the tank 54 and gently inclined so that the game balls flow to the downstream side. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 by receiving the supply of game balls from the tank rail 55 having the above, the case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and the case rail 56. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10 such as the payout device 71 are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power supply switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies the electric power required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply 85. By the ON / OFF operation of the power switch 88, the supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted with respect to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings formed in the game board 30. Be guided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is an entry opening member that forms an entry opening through which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the game board 30 in plurality. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 2).

The first starting port 33 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port member that forms an entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to execute a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service opening is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is opened in a predetermined mode. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second starting port 34. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and also includes an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize in the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big hit is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the opening / closing door 36b repeats an open state and a closed state in which the game ball can win a prize. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to the case where a big hit is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is in the open state. It is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 33, if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can win the big winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 34, even if a big hit is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can win the big winning opening 36a. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

An out opening 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and a game ball that has not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 is out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

When a winning lottery triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 33 is performed, the first symbol display unit 37a has a variable display or a variable display as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result. Make a predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

When a winning lottery triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 34 is performed, the second symbol display unit 37b has a variable display or a variable display as a display mode until the segment display is made to display a display corresponding to the lottery result. Make a predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won a prize in the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won a prize in the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35 is performed, the normal drawing unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined mode, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. A round game is an opening / closing door until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a prize in the variable winning device 36. It is a game in which the open state of 36b is continued. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game round is started.

The special drawing unit 37, the normal drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery during and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The liquid crystal display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning of the first starting port 33, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. .. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by entering the ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts when a big hit is won. .. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbols 1 to 8 in a variable manner. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory view showing a display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom to bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol string Z1, the symbol column Z3, and the symbol column Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbols is completed and the display is stopped, and the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of variable display of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and the symbols of each symbol row are used. Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, the "game times" means from the start of the variation display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variation display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. That is, it is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol is obtained for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 determines a predetermined value for each game. After the symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the winning of the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 3, a pair of nails (so-called life nails and belly button nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a program recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the required operating power by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, and the like, and supplies the power supply device 85 to each device. Supply power.

The power supply device 85 includes a power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power failure monitoring circuit 86 outputs a power failure information signal when a power failure occurs by monitoring the power supply. The “time of power failure” includes not only the time when a power failure of the commercial power source occurs, but also the time when the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state (when the power is off).

Further, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to multiple detection sensors. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not the vehicle has passed 35. Further, the MPU 62 executes a big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the second starting opening 34, and executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on the entry of the ball into the through gate 35. do.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , The main display unit 45 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the electric accessory opening is won as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened. In each game, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. Further, when the jackpot type is determined in the open / close execution mode and the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is determined, the display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is performed. When is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a prize is specified for the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out. The corresponding prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 and the game ball launch button 26 are connected to the launch control device 80.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And controls the display control device 100. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the advance notice effect executed in each game round, etc. are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for a reach lottery as to whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed out of alignment.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C5 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b. The hold information storage area 64b is composed of a first hold area Ra, a second hold area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total hold quantity storage area. When the game balls sequentially win the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the winning timing are chronologically stored in the hold information storage area 64b. Stored in.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins in the first starting port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second starting port 34. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the prize is won. The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a winning / failing table in the winning / failing table storage area 63a (FIG. 5) of the ROM 63.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a. The pachinko machine 10 is set with a low probability mode and a high probability mode as a lottery mode for winning lottery. The high-probability mode is a gaming state started by winning a probabilistic jackpot, and refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery is relatively higher than in the low-probability mode. FIG. 7 (a) shows a pass / fail table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7 (b) shows a pass / fail table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7A, the value of the random numbers for winning the big hit is 15 under the gaming state in which the winning / losing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the winning lottery. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, the value of the random number that wins the big hit is 30. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary.

Returning to FIG. 6, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described below. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 has a configuration in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. More specifically, the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 33, and the hold information is stored at the timing when the game ball wins in the second start port 34. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the opening / closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 30 seconds have elapsed or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until the number is reached. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b. Can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b at one time is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode in which the low-frequency winning mode is applied, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur even in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode.

The number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed, the opening limit time for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are determined by winning the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the frequency of occurrence of the above is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the number of opening limits for one opening is set to be large. good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 36 is not substantially won.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the above-mentioned (2) opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / losing table for the high probability mode as a winning / failing table, and a winning / failing table As a result, it is possible to set a low-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a winning / failing table for the low-probability mode. As explained with reference to FIG. 7, the case where the winning lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / failing table is compared with the case where the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / failing table, and the jackpot is won. There is a high probability of doing so.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 continues to launch the game ball in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are used so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the above-mentioned situations. Can be set.

Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C5 is the same, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening is the same. Compared to the low-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric combination opening is won may be set more often, and one opening time may be set longer. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times in the high frequency support mode, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a prize is generated in the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists in the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first starting port 33 is higher than that of the second starting port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning of the second starting port 34 is higher than that of the first starting port 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is won in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. Can be done.

The configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is set to the electric service open state more frequently than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the electric power in the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning role. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing times are prepared for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed, the frequency is low in the high frequency support mode. It may be set so that a shorter reservation time is more easily selected or the average reservation time is shorter than the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased by applying the condition of any one or any combination of shortening the average securing time and increasing the winning probability. good.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a plurality of types of jackpots are sorted by using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 16R normal. A jackpot, 8R normal jackpot is set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply "lottery mode"). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 5" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "6 to 23" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "24-27" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "28-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability of a probability variation jackpot is 60% of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", and the probability of a normal jackpot is the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39". It is 40% of the value of. The number and value of random numbers that win the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the mode of jackpot is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R probability variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34 are 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R probability variation jackpot. , 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 12" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "13 to 23" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "24 to 30" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "31 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot is 60%, the probability of becoming a normal jackpot is 40%, and the first starting port 33 It is the same as the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning prize, but the distribution between 16R and 8R is more likely to be 16R than the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning prize at the first starting port 33. It has become. The number and value of random numbers that win the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

As described above, the distribution mode of the jackpot type between the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is provided with a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the second starting port 34 of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 will be awarded a prize. In addition, if the result is a failure in the winning / failing lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not performed, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Returning to FIG. 6, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described below. The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the update value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first starting port 33, and at the timing when the game ball wins in the second starting port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb is for reach determination stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the execution area AE. It is checked against the table to determine whether to generate reach. However, when the jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, some combinations of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, with the reach line formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. Further, when the reach effect is performed or whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed before the reach display is performed, the reach random number counter C3 or other counters are used to determine. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the fluctuation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the liquid crystal display device 41 when determining the fluctuation pattern. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C5 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C5 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 249, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C5 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C5. For example, when C5 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and when C5 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the closed state.

The combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra corresponds to the hold information related to the first start port 33, and is the second hold area. The combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in Rb corresponds to the hold information related to the second starting port 34, and these hold information are special in the present invention. Corresponds to information.

A3. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 5) and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs, fixed value data, tables, and the like executed by the MPU 92. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

A4. Composition of the first starting port and life nail:
FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the first starting port 33 and its surroundings. In the figure, the X-axis positive direction indicates the right side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front, the Y-axis positive direction indicates the upper side of the game board 30, and the Z-axis positive direction indicates the front side of the game board 30. That is, the X-axis direction indicates the front right / left direction of the game board 30, the Y-axis direction indicates the vertical direction of the game board 30, and the Z-axis direction indicates the front-rear direction of the game board 30. The X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are three axes orthogonal to each other. Hereinafter, the positive direction of the X axis is referred to as "+ X direction", the negative direction of the X axis is referred to as "-X direction", the positive direction of the Y axis is referred to as "+ Y direction", and the negative direction of the Y axis is referred to as "-Y direction". The positive direction of the Z axis is called the "+ Z direction", and the negative direction of the Z axis is called the "-Z direction".

The first starting port 33 is composed of an entry port member that forms an entry port 33a into which a game ball can enter. Specifically, the first starting port 33 has a hollow box shape, a ball entry port 33a is formed on the surface on the + Y direction side, and the game board 30 penetrates the surface on the −Z direction side in the front-rear direction. A ball ejection port 33b communicating with the opening (not shown) is formed. The game ball entered from the ball entry port 33a is discharged from the ball ejection port 33b through the first starting port 33, and is sent to the opening penetrating the game board 30 in the front-rear direction. The first starting port 33 is made of a translucent resin member.

As described above, a pair of nails 42 are planted above the first starting port 33. Hereinafter, the nail on the + X direction side of the pair of nails 42 is referred to as a "first nail 42a", and the nail on the −X direction side of the pair of nails 42 is referred to as a “second nail 42b”.

Each of the nails 42 provided in the pachinko machine 10 including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b has a substantially hemispherical head portion 421 and a substantially cylindrical body portion 422. For example, it is integrally formed of brass material. The body portion 422 is straight and has a sharp tip, and a spiral thread groove 422s (see FIG. 11) is formed in a part of the outer peripheral surface. The nail 42 is driven into the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 up to the screw groove 422s, so that even if the game ball collides with the plywood 30a, the nail 42 is hard to come off from the game board 30 due to an impact. Each nail 42 is driven by an automatic nail gun. At least a part of each nail 42 may be configured so that its inclination is adjusted as necessary after being driven by an automatic nail gun.

At least at the manufacturer's shipping stage, each nail 42 is approximately perpendicular to the plywood 30a. Specifically, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first starting port 33 intersect the surface of the plywood 30a at right angles, that is, a slight angle θ1 with respect to the + Z axis direction. , Θ2 is tilted. The inclination angle of at least a part of the nails 42 including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b is determined in order to match the ball ejection rate and the winning rate with the design value. The inclination angles of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b will be described in detail below.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42a and 42b and a first starting port 33. FIG. 11A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 1-1 in FIG. 10, and FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line 2-2 in FIG. That is, FIG. 11A shows a case where the first and second nails 42a and 42b and the first starting port 33 are viewed from the + Y direction side (upper side) to the −Y direction side (lower side) ( Hereinafter, it is also simply referred to as “when viewed from above”). FIG. 11B shows a case where the pair of nails 42a and 42b and the first starting port 33 are viewed from the + X direction side (right side) to the −X direction side (left side) (hereinafter, simply “viewed from the right side”). It is also called "when"). In FIG. 11B, the second nail 42b located on the left side is hidden behind the first nail 42a located on the right side and cannot be seen.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when viewed from above, the first nail 42a located on the right side has the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 from the + Z direction (dashed line). It is provided so as to be inclined by the first angle θ1 on the right side (+ X direction). In terms of general angle, the first nail 42a is provided so as to be inclined by + θ1 (counterclockwise θ1) with respect to the + Z direction.

In general, the pachinko machine 10 has undergone a device performance test, and installation permission has been granted to each pachinko parlor, assuming that the devices produced in the same model have substantially the same performance. The first angle θ1 is a predetermined angle, and in the present embodiment, it is an angle when the type verification test is passed. The first angle θ1 is, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, and in this embodiment, it is, for example, 5 degrees.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, the first nail 42a is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X-axis and the Z-axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the first nail 42a is provided along the Z-axis direction.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when viewed from above, the second nail 42b located on the left side has the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is provided so as to be inclined by the second angle θ2 on the left side (−X direction). In terms of general angle, the second nail 42b is provided so as to be inclined by −θ2 (clockwise θ2) with respect to the + Z direction. The second angle θ2 is a predetermined angle, and in the present embodiment, is an angle when the type verification test is passed. The second angle θ2 is, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is, for example, 5 degrees in the present embodiment. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are the same in the present embodiment, but may be different instead of the same. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are also the angles intended at the shipping stage of the manufacturer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, the second nail 42b is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X-axis and the Z-axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the second nail 42b is provided along the Z-axis direction.

As a result of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b being provided so as to be inclined as described above, as shown in FIG. 11A, between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b. The distance (width) of is gradually increasing from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side).

The ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33 is an opening along the XZ plane and has a trapezoidal shape as shown in FIG. 11A. Specifically, a first edge (edge) 331 corresponding to one of a pair of parallel opposite sides forming a trapezoid, and a second edge 332 corresponding to the other of the pair of opposite sides. , The third edge 333 corresponding to one of the opposite sides of the other set forming the trapezoid, and the fourth edge 334 corresponding to the other of the opposite sides of the other set described above, thereby providing the entrance 33a. It is composed. The first edge 331 and the second edge 332 are parallel to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 (that is, along the X-axis direction), and the first edge 331 is the entrance 33a. The second edge 332 is located on the + Z direction side of the ball entry port 33a. The third edge 333 is located on the + X direction side of the ball entry port 33a, and the fourth edge 334 is located on the −X direction side of the ball entry port 33a. The first to fourth edges 331 to 334 can also be said to be the inner slope of the entry port 33a when measuring the inner method.

In the present embodiment, the length of the first edge 331 is longer than the length of the second edge 332. When the angle on the + X direction side of the two internal angles at both ends of the second edge 332 is δ1, and the angle on the −X direction side of the above two internal angles is δ2, δ1 and δ2 are as follows. (1) and (2) are satisfied.

δ1 = θ1 + 90 degrees ... (1)
δ2 = θ2 + 90 degrees ... (2)
However, θ1 is the inclination angle of the first nail 42a described above, and θ2 is the inclination angle of the second nail 42b described above.

According to the equation (1), it can be seen that the third edge 333 has a configuration in which the direction with respect to the end on the −Z direction side is inclined by the first angle θ1 from the + Z direction to the right side (+ X direction). .. According to the equation (2), the fourth edge 334 has a configuration in which the direction with respect to the end on the −Z direction side is inclined by the second angle θ2 from the + Z direction to the left side (−X direction). I understand. The distance (width) between the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the entrance 33a gradually increases from the rear side (-Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side). There is.

Therefore, when viewed from above, the first and second nails 42a and 42b and the ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33 have a third edge 333 as the body portion 422 of the first nail 42a. The fourth edge 334 is parallel to the central axis direction of the second nail 42b, and the fourth edge 334 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 42b. In other words, the inclination angle of the first nail 42a by the third edge 333, that is, the angle formed by the first nail 42a and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the perpendicular direction of the surface of the plywood 30a). The angle formed by the fourth edge 334 is the inclination angle of the second nail 42b, that is, the angle formed by the second nail 42b and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the surface of the plywood 30a). The angle between the vertical line direction and the vertical line direction) is specified.

A5. The action and effect of the embodiment The first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first starting port 33 are tilted due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. The condition may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional example. In the conventional example, the same first nail 42a as in the first embodiment is used. As described above, the first nail 42a is inclined by the first angle θ1 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+ X direction) at the time of shipment. A first starting port P33 is provided below the first nail 42a (in the −Y direction), as in the first embodiment. The first starting port P33 is different from the first starting port 33 of the first embodiment in that the ball entry port P33a has a rectangular shape. That is, in the conventional example, the third edge P93 of the ball entry port P33a is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 (Z-axis direction).

In the conventional pachinko machine, the inclination of the first nail 42a changes from the time of shipment, for example, as shown by the broken line (42a') in the figure, due to an accidental impact during transportation, aging, or the like. There was a case that it ended up. In that case, the repairer needs to return to the first angle θ, which is the angle at the time of shipment. However, it is difficult for the repairer to grasp how much the first angle θ is tilted from the pachinko machine whose nail tilt has changed. He imposed a lot of experience with adjustments and the use of specialized adjustment equipment.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33 so as to match the inclination of the nails 42a and 42b intended by the manufacturer, which is the angle at the time of shipment. The orientations of the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 in the above are predetermined. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, the first nail 42a becomes the third edge 333 when viewed from above, relying on the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the ball entry port 33a. By checking and correcting the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b so that the second nail 42b is parallel to the fourth edge 334 so as to be parallel, the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b can be adjusted by the manufacturer. You can easily return to the intended tilt. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nail 42 and a special adjusting tool.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first and second balls are used by using the original ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33 without separately providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Since the inclinations of the nails 42a and 42b can be repaired, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming complicated.

As a modification of the first embodiment, the third edge 333 that defines the inclination angle of the first nail 42a and the fourth edge 334 that defines the inclination angle of the second nail 42b are formed with the surroundings. May be configured to be colored with different colors. According to this configuration, the repairer can easily recognize that the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 serve as a reference for repairing the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b. Can be done.

A6. Modification example of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as that of the above embodiment will be omitted.

A6-1. Modification 1:
The pachinko machine as the first modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the inclination direction of the life nail and the shape of the ball entry port formed in the first starting port. , The composition of the remainder is the same. In the pachinko machine of the first modification, the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 542a and 542b and a first starting port 533 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the first modification. FIG. 13 (a) is a view corresponding to FIG. 11 (a) in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from above. FIG. 13 (b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11 (b) in the first embodiment, and is a view viewed from the right side.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the distance (width) between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b is from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side). The composition gradually widened toward. On the other hand, in the modified example 1, as shown in FIG. 13, the distance (width) between the first nail 542a and the second nail 542b is from the rear side (-Z direction side) to the front side (-Z direction side). It gradually narrows toward (+ Z direction side). Specifically, the first nail 542a located on the right side has only the first angle φ1 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (-X direction) in the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423. It is provided so as to be in an inclined direction. The second nail 542b located on the left side is oriented so that the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is inclined by the second angle φ2 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+ X direction). It is provided in. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are predetermined predetermined angles, and in the present embodiment, they are angles when the type verification test is passed. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are equal, but may be different instead.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the distance (width) between the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the ball entry port 33a formed in the first starting port 33 is rearward. The configuration gradually widened from the side (-Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side). On the other hand, in the modified example 1, as shown in FIG. 13, the distance (width) between the third edge 593 and the fourth edge 594 at the ball entry port 533a formed in the first starting port 533. ) Gradually narrows from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side). Specifically, the third edge 593 located on the right side has a configuration in which the direction with respect to the end on the −Z direction side is inclined by the first angle φ1 from the + Z direction to the left side (−X direction). There is. The fourth edge 594 located on the left side has a configuration in which the direction with respect to the end on the −Z direction side is inclined by a second angle φ2 from the + Z direction to the right side (+ X direction).

Therefore, even in the pachinko machine of the first modification, the first and second nails 542a and 542b and the ball entry port 533a of the first starting port 533 are the first of the ball entry ports 533a when viewed from above. The edge 593 of 3 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 542a, and the fourth edge 594 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 542b.

According to the pachinko machine of the first modification configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third edge 593 and the fourth edge 594 at the entrance 533a are relied on. Tilt each nail 542a, 542b so that the first nail 542a is parallel to the third edge 593 and the second nail 542b is parallel to the fourth edge 594 when viewed from above. You can check and fix it. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 542a and 542b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails and a special adjusting tool.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the original first starting port 33 does not need to be separately provided with a dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired by using the ball entry port 33a, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-2. Modification 2:
The pachinko machine as the second modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the inclination direction of the life nail and the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration is the same. Is. In the pachinko machine of the second modification, the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 642a and 642b and a first starting port 633 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the second modification. FIG. 14 (a) is a view corresponding to FIG. 11 (a) in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from above. FIG. 14 (b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11 (b) in the first embodiment, and is a view viewed from the right side.

In the first embodiment and the first modification, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b are positive in the X-axis from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) in the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423. Or it was configured to incline in the negative direction (right and left). On the other hand, in the modified example 2, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are positive in the Y-axis from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) in the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423. It is configured to incline in the direction (upper side). Specifically, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are along the Z axis as shown in FIG. 14A when viewed from above, and when viewed from the right side, FIG. 14 (b). ), The central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is provided so as to be inclined by a predetermined angle μ1 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction). The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in the present embodiment, it is an angle when the type verification test is passed. The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in the present embodiment, it is an angle when the type verification test is passed. The predetermined angle μ1 is, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees.

In the first embodiment and the first modification, the ball entry port 33a formed in the first starting port 33 has a trapezoidal shape. On the other hand, in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 14A, the ball entry port 633a formed in the first starting port 633 has a rectangular shape. Therefore, the third edge 693 and the fourth edge 694 on the + X direction side and the −X direction side constituting the ball entry port 633a are configured along the + Z direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 14B, the surface 633S on the upper side (+ Y direction side) of the first starting port 633 is on the upper side from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) with reference to the end portion 633b in contact with the plywood 30a. It is configured to be inclined by a predetermined angle μ1 in the (+ Y direction).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the second modification, when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of each body portion 422 of the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b is the entry port of the first starting port 633. It is parallel to the upper surface 633S of 633a.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 configured as described above, the inclination angle of the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633 is set so as to match the upward inclination of the nails 642a and 642b intended by the manufacturer. It is predetermined. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, each of the nails 642a and 642b is parallel to the plane 633S when viewed from the right side, relying on the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633. The inclination of the nails 642a and 642b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 642a and 642b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails or a special adjusting tool.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the second modification, the inclination of the nail is repaired by using the original flat surface 633S of the first starting port 33 without separately providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-3. Modification 3:
The pachinko machine as the third modification is different from the pachinko machine as the second modification only in the inclination direction of the life nail, and the residual configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, the same configuration as the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 742a and 742b and a first starting port 733 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the third modification. FIG. 15 (a) is a view corresponding to FIG. 11 (a) in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from above. FIG. 15B is a view corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from the right side.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 14B, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b have the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 in the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). It was configured to incline upward (+ Y direction) by a predetermined angle μ1. On the other hand, in the modified example 3, as shown in FIG. 15B, the first nail 742a and the second nail 742b have the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 in the + Z direction. It is configured to be inclined downward (-Y direction) by a predetermined angle ν1 from the (dashed-dotted line). The predetermined angle ν1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in the present embodiment, it is an angle when the type verification test is passed. The predetermined angle ν1 is, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees.

In the third modification, the ball entry port 733a formed in the first starting port 733 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. However, unlike the modified example 2, the upper surface 733S of the first starting port 733 has a predetermined angle from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the lower side (-Y direction) with reference to the end portion 733b in contact with the plywood 30a. The configuration is inclined by ν1.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, when viewed from the right side, the central axial direction of each body portion 422 of the first nail 742a and the second nail 742b is the ball entry port of the first starting port 733. It is parallel to the upper surface 733S of the 733a.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3 configured as described above, as in the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, each nail 742a is viewed from the right side by relying on the upper surface 733S of the first starting port 733. , 742b can be corrected by checking the inclination of each nail 742a, 742b so that it is parallel to the plane 733S. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 742a and 742b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails and a special adjusting tool.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, the inclination of the nail is repaired by using the original flat surface 733S of the first starting port 733 without separately providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-4. Modification 4:
The pachinko machine as the fourth modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the inclination direction of the life nail and the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration is the same. Is. In the pachinko machine of the fourth modification, the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 842a and 842b and a first starting port 833 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 4. FIG. 16A is a view corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from above. FIG. 16B is a view corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from the right side.

In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment and the first to third modifications, the first nail and the second nail, which are life nails, have the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 in the + Z direction (two points). The configuration was such that the chain line was inclined in any of the right side (+ X direction), the left side (-X direction), the upper side (+ Y direction), and the lower side (-Y direction). On the other hand, in the modified example 4, the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b, which are life nails, are from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) in the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423. The configuration is such that it tilts in the following directions. The direction of this inclination is an angle at which both the X-axis and the Y-axis intersect at an angle other than a right angle. Specifically, it has the following configuration.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11A, the first nail 42a located on the right side has the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 in the + Z direction when viewed from above. It is tilted from (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+ X direction) by the first angle θ1, and as shown in FIG. 11B, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 is along the Z-axis direction when viewed from the right side. It was configured like this. On the other hand, in the modified example 4, the first nail 842a located on the right side is the same as the first nail 42a of the first embodiment when viewed from above, as shown in FIG. 16A. As shown in FIG. 16B, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is determined from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction) when viewed from the right side. It was configured to be tilted by an angle of ξ1.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11A, the second nail 42b located on the left side has the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 when viewed from above. It is inclined by the second angle θ2 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (−X direction), and as shown in FIG. 11B, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 is Z when viewed from the right side. It was configured to follow the axial direction. On the other hand, in the modified example 4, the second nail 842b located on the left side is the same as the first nail 42a of the first embodiment when viewed from above, as shown in FIG. 16A. As shown in FIG. 16B, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is determined from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction) when viewed from the right side. It was configured to be tilted by an angle of ξ1.

In the fourth modification, the ball entry port 833a formed in the first starting port 833 has the same trapezoidal shape as that of the first embodiment. However, the upper surface 833S of the first starting port 833 is different from the first embodiment and the second modification, and is from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction) with reference to the end portion 833b in contact with the plywood 30a. It is configured to be inclined by a predetermined angle ξ1. The predetermined angle ξ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in the present embodiment, it is an angle when the type verification test is passed. The predetermined angle ξ1 is, for example, any value of 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, the first and second nails 842a, the nail 842b, and the ball entry port 833a of the first starting port 833 have a third edge 893 when viewed from above. The first nail 842a is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422, and the fourth edge 894 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 842b. Further, when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of each body portion 422 of the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b is parallel to the upper surface 833S of the ball entry port 833a of the first starting port 833. It has become.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4 configured as described above, the first nail 842a is viewed from above, relying on the third edge 893 and the fourth edge 894 at the entrance 833a. The inclination of each of the nails 842a and 842b can be confirmed and corrected so that the second nail 842b is parallel to the third edge 894 and parallel to the third edge 894. Further, relying on the upper surface 833S of the first starting port 833, the inclinations of the nails 842a and 842b are confirmed and corrected so that the nails 842a and 842b are parallel to the plane 833S when viewed from the right side. can do. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 842a and 842b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails or a special adjusting tool.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the original first starting port 833 is provided without separately providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired by using it, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-5. Modification 5:
In the pachinko machines of the first embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 4, the reference portion that serves as a reference for confirming whether or not the inclinations of the first nail and the second nail, which are life nails, are parallel to each other when repairing the inclination is provided. , A predetermined portion of the first starting port, for example, the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 of the ball entry port 33a shown in FIG. 11, and the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633 shown in FIG. Met. On the other hand, in the modified example 5, the reference portion is configured by a dedicated mark provided at the first starting port. The details will be described below.

The pachinko machine as the fifth modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the residue including the first and second nails 42a and 42b. The composition of is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 5, the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42a and 42b and a first starting port 933 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 5. FIG. 17A is a view corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from above. In FIG. 17A, a part of the first and second nails 42a and 42b is broken and omitted for convenience of illustration. FIG. 17B is a view corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the ball entry port 933a formed in the first starting port 933 has a rectangular shape as in the modified example 2. The upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. A long rectangular mark 951, 952 is printed on this surface 933S. The marks 951 and 952 are colored by printing.

On the surface 933S, the first mark 951 is printed on the right side with respect to the right edge 993 of the entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 951 and the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 42a located on the right side are parallel. On surface 933S, the second mark 952 is printed on the left side with respect to the left edge 994 of the entry port 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952 and the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 42b located on the left side are parallel. Moreover, when viewed from above, the right outline of the first mark 951 is located slightly to the right of the right outline of the body 422 of the first nail 42a, and the left outline of the second mark 952. Is located slightly to the left of the left outline of the body portion 422 of the second nail 42b. That is, when viewed from above, at least a part of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least a part of the second mark 952 is not hidden by the second nail 42b.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 5 configured as described above, the first nail 42a is the first mark 951 when viewed from above, relying on the first mark 951 and the second mark 952. The inclination of each of the nails 42a and 42b can be confirmed and corrected so that the second nail 42b is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952 so as to be parallel to the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails and a special adjusting tool. Further, when viewed from above, at least a part of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least a part of the second mark 952 is not hidden by the second nail 42b. , 1st and 2nd marks 951,952 are highly visible. Therefore, it is easy to determine the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b.

A6-6. Modification 6:
Another example in which the above-mentioned reference portion is configured by a dedicated mark provided at the first starting port will be described below as a modified example 6.

The pachinko machine as the modification 6 is different from the pachinko machine as the modification 2 only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails 642a and 642b. Is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 6, the same configuration as the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 642a and 642b and a first starting port 1033 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the sixth modification. FIG. 18A is a view corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from above. FIG. 18B is a view corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the ball entry port 1033a formed in the first starting port 1033 has a rectangular shape as in the modified example 2. The upper surface 1033S of the first starting port 1033 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. A long rectangular mark 1051 is printed on the right side surface 1033T of the first starting port 1033.

When viewed from the right side, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 642a located on the right side. The mark 1051 is colored by printing.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 6 configured as described above, each nail 642a relies on the mark 1051 so that the nails 642a and 642b are parallel to the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 when viewed from the right side. , 642b can be checked and corrected. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 642a and 642b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails or a special adjusting tool.

The first mark 951 and the second mark 952 in the modified example 5 and the mark 1051 in the modified example 6 are marked with irregularities on the surface of the first starting port 1033 instead of those colored by printing. It may be the one that was printed. Specifically, it may be replaced with a rib, a dent, a step, or the like. Further, the shape of the mark does not have to be limited to a long rectangular shape, and any shape may be used as long as the direction can be defined. For example, it may be an arrow symbol, two points indicating a base point and an end point, or the like.

A6-7. Modification 7:
The pachinko machine as the modification 7 is different from the pachinko machine as the modification 5 only in the orientation of the first mark and the second mark, and the first and second nails 42a and 42b are different. The configuration of the remainder including the shape of the first starting port 933 and the shape of the first starting port 933 is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 7, the same configuration as the pachinko machine of the modified example 5 is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42a and 42b and a first starting port 933 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 7. FIG. 19A is a view corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from above. In FIG. 19A, a part of the first and second nails 42a and 42b is broken and omitted for convenience of illustration. FIG. 19B is a view corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, and is a view seen from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the first starting port 933 is the same as the modified example 5. The ball entry port 933a included in the first starting port 933 has a rectangular shape, and the upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. Long rectangular marks 1151 and 1152 are printed on this surface 933S.

On the surface 933S, the first mark 1151 is printed on the right side with respect to the right edge 993 of the entry port 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30. That is, the first mark 1151 is printed on the plywood 30a, ensuring that it is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 depending on its longitudinal direction. In the present embodiment, by printing the first right-angled mark 1153 indicating that it is a right angle, the first mark 1151 can be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 at a glance. I try to find out that it is guaranteed.

On the surface 933S, the second mark 1152 is printed on the left side with respect to the left edge 994 of the entry port 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30. That is, the second mark 1152 is printed on the plywood 30a, ensuring that it is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 depending on its longitudinal direction. In the present embodiment, by printing the second right angle mark 1154 indicating that it is a right angle, the second mark 1152 can be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 at a glance. I try to find out that it is guaranteed. Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, by printing the third right angle mark 1155 on the right side surface of the first starting port 933, the upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 can press the game board 30. It may be found that it is guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the constituent plywood 30a. The first to third right angle marks 1153 to 1155 are not always necessary and may be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 7 configured as described above, the inclination of the first nail 42a can be confirmed by relying on the first mark 1151, and the second mark 1152 is relied on to confirm the inclination of the first nail 42a. It is possible to confirm the inclination of the nail 42a. Specifically, by comparing the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 with the orientation of the first nail 42a and the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 with the orientation of the second nail 42b, the first and second nails 42b are compared. The inclination of the second nails 42a and 42b can be confirmed. Therefore, the nails 42a and 42b can be easily adjusted.

As another modification, in the modification 6 shown in FIG. 18, the orientation of the mark 1051 may be changed. Specifically, in another modification, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is made parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 when viewed from the right side. That is, in the modified example 6 shown in FIG. 18, the mark 1051 printed on the right side surface 1033T of the first starting port 1033 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 depending on its longitudinal direction. It is guaranteed that the configuration will be changed to the one printed on the plywood 30a. Also with this configuration, it is possible to confirm the degree of inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b in the vertical direction.

The first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in the modified example 7 are colored by printing, but instead, the surface of the first starting port may be provided with irregularities to mark the marks. Specifically, it may be replaced with a rib, a dent, a step, or the like. Further, the shape of the mark does not have to be limited to a long rectangular shape, and any shape may be used as long as the direction can be defined.

In the modified example 7, the first mark 1151 and the second mark described in the first starting port 933 are the reference portions that guarantee that the reference portion is provided perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30. It was set to 1152. On the other hand, as a modification, instead of the mark, a protrusion made of resin, for example, provided on the game board 30 separately from the first starting port 933 may be provided. In short, any configuration can be used as long as it guarantees that the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 is provided perpendicularly to the surface of the plywood 30a.

Further, as another modification, the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in the modification 7 may be added in the first embodiment and the modifications 1 and 4 thereof. According to this configuration, the inclination of the nail is also caused by the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in addition to the third edge on the right side and the fourth edge 334 on the left side that constitute the ball entrance. Since the condition can be confirmed, the nail can be adjusted more accurately.

A6-8. Modification 8:
The pachinko machine as the modification 8 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails. Are the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 8, the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the first starting port 1233 provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 8 and its periphery. In the first embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 7, the first starting port, for example, the first starting port 33 shown in FIG. 10 has a hollow box shape and is formed on the upper surface (+ Y direction side). The ball mouth 33a has a first edge 331 on the front side (+ Z direction side), a second edge 332 on the rear side (-Z direction side), a third edge 333 on the right side (+ X direction side), and a left side. It was composed of a fourth edge 334 (on the −X direction side). On the other hand, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 20, the first starting port 1233 has a hollow box shape in which the wall surface on the rear side (−Z direction side) is removed. That is, the upper end surface of the first starting port 1233 has a substantially U-shape.

The ball entry port 1233a formed on the upper surface (+ Y direction side) of the first starting port 1233 has a first edge 1291 on the front side (+ Z direction side) and a second edge 1293 on the right side (+ X direction side). It is composed of a third edge 1294 on the left side (-X direction side) and a part of the surface of the plywood 30a. The game ball entered from the entry port 1233a passes through the first start opening 1233 and is sent to the opening 30c penetrating the game board 30 in the front-rear direction.

The second edge 1293 on the right side (+ X direction side) has the direction with respect to the end on the −Z direction side from the + Z direction to the right side (+ X direction) as in the case of the third edge 333 in the first embodiment. It is tilted by the first angle θ1. The third edge 1294 on the left side (-X direction side) has a direction from the + Z direction to the left side (-X direction) with respect to the end portion on the -Z direction side, as in the case of the fourth edge 334 in the first embodiment. ) Is tilted by the second angle θ2. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are the inclination angles of the first and second nails 42a and 42b at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, as in the first embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 8 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the second edge 1293 and the third edge 1294 at the entrance 1233a are relied on. In the same manner as in the first embodiment, the inclination of each of the nails 42a and 42b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails and a special adjusting tool.

In addition to the first embodiment, the shape of the first starting port described above, that is, the shape of the first starting port having a substantially U-shaped upper end face, is the modification 1 to 7 described so far. In, the configuration may be adopted.

A6-9. Modification 9:
The pachinko machine as the modification 9 differs from the pachinko machine 10 as the modification 8 only in the shape of the first starting port, and the residual configuration including the first and second nails is different. It is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 9, the same configuration as the pachinko machine of the modified example 8 is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing the first starting port 1333 provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 9 and its periphery. Like the first starting port 1233 in the modified example 8, the first starting port 1333 has a substantially U-shaped upper end face. On that basis, the first starting port 1333 is different from the first starting port 1233 in the modified example 8 in the following points (i) to (iii).

(I) In the first starting port 1233 in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 20, the second edge 1293 on the right side (+ X direction side) and the left side (-X direction side) constituting the ball entry port 1233a. The third edge 1294 was configured to be inclined by the first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 from the + Z direction. On the other hand, in the first starting port 1333 in the modified example 9, as shown in FIG. 21, the second edge 1393 on the right side (+ X direction side) and the third edge 1394 on the left side (−X direction side) Is parallel to the + Z direction.

(Ii) In the first starting port 1333 in the modified example 9, as shown in FIG. 21, the angle of inclination of the game machine with respect to the first nail 42a on the outer surface 1333b of the side wall on the right side of the first starting port 1333 at the time of shipment. The first numerical information Na indicating the first angle θ1 which is The second numerical information Nb indicating the second angle θ2 is described. On the other hand, the first starting port 1233 in the modified example 8 does not have such a configuration. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are numerical values indicating an angle, and are, for example, "5 degrees".

(Iii) The first starting port 1233 in the modified example 8 has an integral configuration. On the other hand, the first starting port 1333 in the modified example 9 is composed of the first part Pa and the second part Pb. The second part Pb is mainly a side wall portion on the left side of the first starting port 1333. The first part Pa is a part other than the second part Pb. Initially, as shown in FIG. 22, the first part Pa and the second part Pb are separate bodies, and at the manufacturing stage, the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined to form the first starting port 1333. Is configured. The first numerical information Na is printed on the first part Pa, and the numerical information Nb is printed on the second part Pb. The printing of the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb is performed before the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 9 configured as described above, the first nail located on the right side is relied on the first numerical information Na printed on the outer surface 1333b of the side wall on the right side of the first starting port 1333. The inclination of 42a can be confirmed and corrected. Further, the inclination of the second nail 42b located on the left side can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the second numerical information Nb printed on the inner surface 1333c of the side wall on the left side of the first starting port 1333. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails and a special adjusting tool.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 9, since the first starting port 1333 is composed of the first part Pa and the second part Pb, the first numerical information Na is provided in the first part Pa at the time of manufacturing. Is printed, and the second numerical information Nb can be easily printed on the second part Pb. In particular, when the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are provided in the same direction so that both the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb can be seen from the right side (+ X direction side). Since the second numerical information Nb located on the left side (-X direction side) is inside the first starting port 1233, it is difficult to print the second numerical information Nb at the time of manufacturing. According to the pachinko machine, since the first start port 1333 is composed of the first part Pa and the second part Pb separately, the second numerical information Nb can be easily printed and the first start can be performed. The mouth 1333 is easy to manufacture.

Although the configuration is such that the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are described, instead of this, the configuration may be such that the information indicating the angle is shown in the display mode of the plurality of segment light emitting units. In short, any configuration can be used as long as it shows information about the angle.

The first starting port 1333 provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 9 was of a type in which the upper end face was substantially U-shaped, but instead of this, the wall surface on the rear side (-Z direction side) was used. It can also be a hollow box-shaped type having. Further, the first starting port 1333 is composed of the first part Pa and the second part Pb, but instead of this, it may be composed of three or more parts. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb indicating the inclination angle of the nail may be configured as described in the first embodiment and the modified examples 1, 4, 5, 7, and 8.

A6-10. Modification 10:
FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing the electric accessory 1410 provided in the pachinko machine as the modified example 10 and its periphery. The electric accessory 1410 is provided, for example, in the lower center of the game board of the pachinko machine. As described above, the game board is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction, and one of the openings 1400 is provided with the electric accessory 1410.

The electric accessory 1410 is an ordinary electric accessory, and is configured as a so-called electric tulip. The electric accessory 1410 includes a pair of right and left movable pieces 1411a and 1411b, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state). The closed state is the state shown in FIG. In the closed state, since the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is small, it is difficult for the game ball to enter. On the other hand, in the open state (see FIG. 24 of the modified example 11), the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b becomes large, and the game ball can easily enter the ball. The game ball that has entered the electric accessory 1410 is sent to the opening 1400. For example, a winning lottery is made based on the entry of the game ball into the electric accessory 1410. Hereinafter, the movable piece on the + X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is referred to as the "first movable piece 1411a", and the movable piece on the -X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is referred to as the "first movable piece 1411a". It is called "2 movable pieces 1411b". Similar to the first embodiment, the + X direction indicates the right side of the front view, and the −X direction indicates the left side of the front view.

A pair of right and left nails 1442a and 1442b are provided above the electric accessory 1410. The probability of the game ball entering the electric accessory 1410 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b. Hereinafter, the nail on the + X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b is referred to as "first nail 1442a", and the nail on the -X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b is referred to as "second nail 1442b". Called. The shapes of the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b are the same as those of the first embodiment.

The first nail 1442a is tilted by a predetermined tilt angle (for example, 5 degrees) in a predetermined tilt direction (for example, + X direction) from the + Z direction in the central axis direction of the body portion with respect to the tip. It is provided. The second nail 1442b is tilted by a predetermined tilt angle (for example, 7 degrees) in a predetermined tilt direction (for example, -X direction) from the + Z direction in the central axis direction of the body portion with respect to the tip. It is provided. The inclination direction and inclination angle of the first nail 1442a and the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1442b are individual and are at the time of shipment of the game machine.

In the electric accessory 1410, the tip portion of the first movable piece 1411a is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter, referred to as “first flat surface”) Sa. The tip portion of the second movable piece 1411b is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter, referred to as "second flat surface") Sb. In the present modification 10, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the first flat surface Sa coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1442a, and the second flat surface It is pre-designed so that the tilt angle and tilt direction of Sb coincide with the tilt direction and tilt angle of the second nail 1442b. In other words, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the first flat surface Sa defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1442a according to the inclination direction and the inclination angle, and the second flat surface Sa. The surface Sb defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1442b according to the inclination direction and the inclination angle thereof.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 10 configured as described above, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the first flat surface Sa of the first movable piece 1411a in the electric accessory 1410 is relied on. The inclination of the first nail 1442a can be confirmed and corrected to the state at the time of shipment. Further, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the inclination of the second nail 1442b is confirmed by relying on the second flat surface Sb of the second movable piece 1411b in the electric accessory 1410, and the state at the time of shipment is confirmed. Can be modified to. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b above the electric accessory 1410 can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a special adjusting tool. be able to.

A6-11. Modification 11:
Compared with the pachinko machine as the modification 10, the pachinko machine as the modification 11 has a different inclination direction and inclination angle of the flat portion in the electric accessory, and further, the first nail and the second nail The position is different. Regarding the configurations other than these, the pachinko machine as the modification 11 and the pachinko machine as the modification 10 are the same.

FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing the electric accessory 1510 provided in the pachinko machine as the modified example 11 and its periphery. The electric accessory 1510 is provided, for example, in the lower center of the game board of the pachinko machine. The electric accessory 1510 is provided in the opening 1400, similarly to the electric accessory 1410 in the modified example 10. Since the opening 1400 is the same as the modified example 10, the same reference numerals are given. Like the electric accessory 1410 in the modified example 10, the electric accessory 1510 includes a pair of right and left movable pieces 1511a and 1511b, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state). Has been done. The open state is the state shown in FIG. 24.

A first nail 1542a is provided in the upper right direction of the electric accessory 1510, and a second nail 1542b is provided in the upper left direction of the electric accessory 1510. The first nail 1542a is tilted by a predetermined tilt angle (for example, 5 degrees) in a predetermined tilt direction (for example, + X direction) from the + Z direction in the central axis direction of the body portion with respect to the tip. It is provided. The second nail 1542b is tilted by a predetermined tilt angle (for example, 7 degrees) in a predetermined tilt direction (for example, -X direction) from the + Z direction in the central axis direction of the body portion with respect to the tip. It is provided. The inclination direction and inclination angle of the first nail 1542a and the inclination direction and inclination angle of the second nail 1542b are individual and are at the time of shipment of the game machine.

In the electric accessory 1510, the tip portion of the first movable piece 1511a is cut off to form the first flat surface Ha, and the tip portion of the second movable piece 1511b is cut off to form the second flat surface Hb. .. In the present modification 11, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the first flat surface Ha coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1542a, and the second flat surface It is pre-designed so that the tilt angle and tilt direction of Hb coincide with the tilt direction and tilt angle of the second nail 1542b. In other words, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the first flat surface Ha defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1542a according to the inclination direction and the inclination angle, and the second flat surface Ha. The surface Hb defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1542b according to the inclination direction and the inclination angle thereof.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 11 configured as described above, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the first flat surface Ha of the first movable piece 1511a in the electric accessory 1510 is relied on. The inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the electric accessory 1510 can be confirmed and corrected. Further, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the electric accessory 1510 relies on the second flat surface Hb of the second movable piece 1511b in the electric accessory 1510. You can check and correct the tilt of. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails and a special adjusting tool. In particular, the electric accessory 1510 is a target for repairing the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b on the upper right and upper left of the electric accessory 1510, which are close to the tip positions of the movable pieces 1511a and 1511b in the open state. And the nail can be easily repaired.

In the modified example 10, the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb may be colored with a color different from the surroundings. Further, in the modified example 11, the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb may be colored with a color different from the surroundings. According to these configurations, the repairer can easily recognize that the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb and the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb serve as a reference for repairing the inclination of the nail. Can be done.

A6-12. Modification 12:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 12 is different from the pachinko machine as the modified example 11 in the shape of the first movable piece provided in the electric accessory, and is the same in the remaining points. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 12, the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 11 is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 25 is a front view showing a first movable piece 1611a of an electric accessory provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 12. The electric accessory in the modified example 12 is configured as a so-called electric tulip as in the modified example 11, and can be switched between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state) as shown by an arrow in the figure. It is configured. The first movable piece 1611a provided in the electric accessory corresponds to the first movable piece 1511a in the modified example 11, and is a movable piece located on the X direction side (right side in the front view).

The first movable piece 1611a includes a movable piece main body portion 1620 and a protruding piece 1630 protruding from the tip end portion of the movable piece main body portion 1620. The end of the protruding piece 1630 on the opposite side of the movable piece main body 1620 is a flat surface (hereinafter, referred to as “first flat surface”) Ta.

Similar to the electric accessory of the modification 11, a pair of nails are provided around the electric accessory in the modification 12. One of the pair of nails is the first nail 1542a in the figure. The first nail 1542a is provided on the upper right of the electric accessory. When the electric accessory is opened, the first flat surface Ta of the protruding piece 1630 provided on the first movable piece 1611a comes closest to the first nail 1542a. When the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the first flat surface Ta coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1542a.

Although not shown, the second movable piece of the electric accessory in the present modification 12 has a shape that is line-symmetrical with respect to the first movable piece 1611a with respect to the Y-axis direction. When the electric accessory is opened, the second flat surface of the protruding piece provided on the second movable piece comes closest to the second nail 1542b (see FIG. 24 of the modified example 11). When the electric accessory is in the open state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the second flat surface coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1542b.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 12 configured as described above, similarly to the modified example 11, when the electric accessory is in the open state, the first flat surface of the first movable piece 1611a in the electric accessory is With reference to Ta, the inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the electric accessory can be confirmed and corrected. Similarly, the inclination of the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the electric accessory can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the second flat surface of the first movable piece. Therefore, the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b on the upper right and upper left of the electric accessory can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a special adjusting tool. can do.

In the modified example 12, the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface may be colored with a color different from the surroundings. According to this configuration, the repairer can easily recognize that the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface serve as a reference for repairing the inclination of the nail.

A6-13. Modification 13:
In the first embodiment and the modified examples 1, 4, and 8, the defining means for defining the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board is the edge portion at the entrance of the first starting port. On the other hand, as a modification, the defining means may be a part of the outer periphery of the first starting port, or any part as long as it is a part of the first starting port. Further, it is not necessary to limit the portion to the portion of the first starting port, and the portion may be a portion related to the second starting port or other ball entry port members. Further, it can be a portion of a member other than the ball entry port member.

A6-14. Modification 14:
In the first embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 12 thereof, nails are used to change the distribution of the game balls, but the nails are not limited to the nails and are rod-shaped, which can change the distribution of the game balls. As long as it is a member, any structure such as a resin protrusion can be used.

A6-15. Modification 15:
In the above-mentioned modifications 10 to 12, an electric tulip, which is an ordinary electric accessory, was adopted as a movable means that can be switched between a closed state and an open state, but instead of this, a mini-attacker, which is an ordinary electric accessory, May be adopted. Specifically, a predetermined portion of the mini-attacker defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board. Further, as the movable means, a special electric accessory such as an attacker (large winning opening) may be adopted instead of the ordinary electric accessory. Specifically, the attacker's predetermined portion defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board. Further, as the movable means, a non-electric accessory such as a mechanical type may be adopted instead of the electric accessory.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Structure of the gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. The components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described with reference to the same reference numerals.

FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 that is combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Illuminations are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect of the effect by lighting or blinking at the time of the winning lottery, the winning of the winning, the occurrence of the reach, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. The details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls rented from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launch mechanism included in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores the game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged to the outside from the lower plate 21.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game effect reflecting the operation.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25. There is provided with a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation operation by the change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, a game ball launch button 26 for the player to operate is provided. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front surface of the game board with the same firing intensity as when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the front view of the game board and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called "right-handed". Further, in the following description, when the game ball is launched by operating the operation handle 25, the game ball flows to the left side of the front view of the game board and flows down the left side of the game board, the player "left". It may be expressed as "hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player activates the game ball launch button 26 after turning on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, thereby launching the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in the front view, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25 in the same manner as the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with the right hand.

FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding the game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicular to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33a, a first starting opening 33b, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, an ordinary electric accessory 53, a variable winning device 54, and a swing. A minute mechanism 120 is provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entry openings into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The distribution mechanism 120 is arranged in the lower part of the center of the game board 30. The distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 into the two flow paths. Of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, one flow path guides the game ball to the first start port 33a, and the other flow path guides the game ball to the first start port 33b. Details of the structure of the distribution mechanism 120 will be described later.

The first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b are entry ports where a game ball can enter. As shown in FIG. 27, the first starting port 33a is arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the left side when the game board 30 is viewed from the front by the distribution mechanism 120 can enter. Further, the first starting port 33b is arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the right side when the game board 30 is viewed from the front can be entered by the distribution mechanism 120. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery described later is executed. The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b is not limited to one, and two or more prize balls may be adopted.

The second starting port 34 is an entry port into which a game ball can enter. As shown in FIG. 27, the second starting port 34 is arranged between the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port 34 is not limited to three, and a configuration in which two or less or four or more prize balls may be adopted may be adopted.

The variable winning device 54 includes a large winning opening 54a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 54b for opening and closing the large winning opening 54a. The opening / closing door 54b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 54a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b, or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, if the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54. Specifically, when the opening / closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing door 54b shifts from a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter to an open state in which the game ball can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 54a of the variable winning device 54, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

The through gate 35a and the through gate 35b are through gates that serve as an opportunity for executing a lottery for operating the ordinary electric accessory 53. As shown in FIG. 27, the through gate 35a is arranged in the distribution mechanism 120. Details of the through gate 35a will be described later. The through gate 35b is outside the distribution mechanism 120, and is arranged on the right side of the distribution mechanism 120 when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. When the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric service is won, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the electric service open state in which the electric service is operated in a predetermined mode. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35a and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b are not held.

The ordinary electric accessory 53 is an electric accessory located below the distribution mechanism 120 and above the first starting port 33b. As described above, the ordinary electric accessory 53 operates in a predetermined mode when the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b is won. Details of the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described later.

Here, the distribution mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described.

FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 28A, the distribution mechanism 120 includes a resin housing for the distribution mechanism 121. In FIG. 28, in order to show the inside of the distribution mechanism housing 121, the outer shape of the distribution mechanism housing 121 is shown by a broken line. The distribution mechanism housing 121 is formed with an opening 122 through which the game ball can flow in, and an opening 123 and an opening 124 through which the game ball can flow out. Further, the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2 are formed in the distribution mechanism housing 121. Further, inside the distribution mechanism housing 121, a distribution rotation unit 125 and a through gate 35a are arranged. The through gate 35a is arranged in the right flow path R2.

The distribution rotating unit 125 includes a rotating shaft 126, and is rotatable about the rotating shaft 126. When the distribution rotating portion 125 rotates clockwise and counterclockwise, the bottom portion of the distribution rotating portion 125 comes into contact with the distribution mechanism housing 121. Therefore, the rotation range of the distribution rotation unit 125 is limited. Further, the distribution rotating portion 125 includes a left side holding portion 127 for temporarily holding the game ball flowing in from the opening 122 and a right side holding portion 128.

An example of the operation of the distribution mechanism 120 is shown with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (d). As shown in FIG. 28A, when the distribution rotating portion 125 is tilted to the left, when the game ball flows in from the opening 122, the game ball is temporarily held by the right holding portion 128. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 28B, the distribution rotating portion 125 rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball held by the right holding portion 128, and the game is held by the right holding portion 128. The sphere is discharged toward the right channel R2. The game ball released from the right side holding portion 128 passes through the through gate 35a, flows through the right side flow path R2, and then flows out from the opening 124. The game ball flowing out of the opening 124 enters the first starting port 33b, or enters the second starting port 34 when the normal electric accessory 53 is operating. The distribution rotating portion 125 after rotating clockwise is maintained in a state of being tilted to the right.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), when the game ball next flows in from the opening 122, the distribution rotating portion 125 is maintained in a state of being tilted to the right, so that the left holding portion 127 is temporarily used. Holds the game ball. After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (d), the distribution rotating unit 125 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball held by the left side holding unit 127, and the game held by the left side holding unit 127. The sphere is discharged toward the left channel R1. The game ball released from the left side holding portion 127 flows out from the opening 123 after flowing through the left side flow path R1. The game ball that has flowed out from the opening 123 enters the first starting port 33a. The distribution rotating portion 125 after rotating counterclockwise maintains a state of being tilted to the left. As described above, the distribution mechanism 120 has a function of alternately distributing the game balls flowing into the opening 122 into the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ordinary electric accessory 53. FIG. 29 (a) shows the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the closed state. As described above, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is arranged below the distribution mechanism 120 and above the first starting port 33b. When the electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is provided as shown in FIG. 29 (b). The movable piece 53a protrudes toward the front side of the game board 30 (hereinafter, also referred to as opening).

As shown in the figure, the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes a movable piece 53a and a convex portion 53b arranged on the movable piece 53a. Further, although not shown in FIG. 29B, the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes a general electric accessory drive unit 53c for driving the movable piece 53a.

As shown in FIG. 29B, the protruding movable piece 53a assists the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, there are roughly two patterns in which the protruding movable piece 53a assists the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. The first pattern is a pattern that assists the game ball to flow in from the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 and the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 to enter the second starting port 34. Specifically, when the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 flows out from the opening 124, if the movable piece 53a protrudes, the movable piece 53a starts the game ball at the second starting port. It guides to 34 and assists in entering the second starting port 34. The second pattern is a pattern that assists the game ball flowing down through the through gate 35b to enter the second starting port 34. Specifically, when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b flows down and reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53, if the movable piece 53a protrudes, the movable piece 53a makes the game ball the first. It guides the ball to the 2 starting port 34 and assists the ball to enter the 2nd starting port 34. In the case of the second pattern, if the movable piece 53a protrudes when the game ball that has not passed through the through gate 35b reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the movable piece 53a is the game. Assists the ball to enter the second starting port 34.

In any of the patterns described above, it is assumed that the normal electric accessory 53 is maintained in the open state until the game ball circulates on the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting port 34. If the normal electric accessory 53 is closed before the game ball circulates on the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting port 34, the above pattern does not apply, and in that case, The game ball circulated on the movable piece 53a does not enter the second starting port 34 and flows further downstream.

After a lapse of a predetermined time from the state of FIG. 29 (b), as shown in FIG. 29 (c), the ordinary electric accessory 53 that was in the open state is closed. That is, the protruding movable piece 53a is housed in the game board 30. The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each type of support mode in which the ordinary electric accessory 53 assists the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. Different to. The support modes provided in the pachinko machine 10 are the time from the start of the electric accessory opening lottery, which is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b, to the output of the lottery result (electric). (Variation time of the accessory opening lottery), the winning probability of the electric accessory opening lottery, and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 are different. Details of the support mode included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described later. The distribution mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 have been described above.

The description returns to FIG. An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are each composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b. When a winning lottery is performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b, the first symbol display unit 37a displays a display corresponding to the lottery result on the segment display. As a display mode until the first symbol is displayed, a variable display of the first symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display unit 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is displayed according to the lottery result when the winning lottery is performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. , A variable display of the second symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is set. It is called fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display is referred to as the first fluctuation time, and the time from the start to the stop display is referred to as the first variation time, and is displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is referred to as the second variable time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of holds of the first start port (first start port 33a and first start port 33b) according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b are held as a total of the two first starting ports.

The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of holds of the second start port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held.

The normal drawing unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is performed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the normal drawing unit 38 has a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode of the light emitting display. Is displayed. When the electric accessory opening lottery is completed, the normal drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined mode, and displays the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding to the number of round games. The round game opens and closes until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 54. This is a game in which the door 54b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends.

The special drawing unit 37, the normal drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being composed of a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display that can show the lottery during and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

The liquid crystal display device 41 displays a symbol when the first symbol display unit 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b. Perform variable display or predetermined display. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b, or the second starting port 34, and is a big hit. It also displays the effect during the open / close execution mode, which shifts when a winner is won. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41a that are variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol for the first liquid crystal display or a symbol for the second liquid crystal display that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a. The second liquid crystal display symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the liquid crystal display device 41 variablely displays symbols 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. As the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol having a pattern such as a character may be adopted for each of the symbols showing the numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 30 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom to bottom. A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 30B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L. Specifically, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34, the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically predetermined. A variable display that scrolls in the direction is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol string Z1, the symbol column Z3, and the symbol column Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbols is completed and the display is stopped, and the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row, and the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the symbol.

Here, the game times is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol is obtained for each game. After the segment display is variablely displayed on one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined value on the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol string is variablely displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30B, the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on the winning of the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is four, respectively.

FIG. 30B is an explanatory view showing a display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a.

In the main display area MA, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 as the liquid crystal symbols shown in FIG. 30 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom. A variable display that scrolls from bottom to top is performed. As shown in FIG. 30B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L1.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the special symbol start port 51, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. Then, each scrolling symbol switches from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol string Z1, the symbol column Z3, and the symbol column Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. .. When the variation display of the symbols is completed and the display is stopped, and the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the effective line L1. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the effective line L1. The mode of the liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-mentioned mode. For example, various modes of display of the liquid crystal symbol can be adopted, such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. be.

Here, the game time means from the start of the variation display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variation display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. The lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of either the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34 is given to the player. It is one unit of the notification process. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34, 1 For each game, after the segment display is variablely displayed on either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Stop the segment display. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34. In the symbol display device 41 for each game, after the symbol sequence is variablely displayed as the symbol for the first liquid crystal display or the symbol for the second liquid crystal display, the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Stop and display the symbol sequence. Further, the time required for one game is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the predetermined lottery result, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 30B, the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on the entry of the ball into the second start port 34 is displayed. The reserved game times are unexecuted game times, and are special acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34. Regarding the information, it refers to the game times in which the variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery has not been started. The number of reserved game times that can be held based on the ball entering the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the hold display corresponding to the four hold game times (hereinafter, also referred to as the first hold game time display) can be displayed in the first hold display area Ds1. In addition, the number of reserved game times that can be held based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second hold display area Ds2 can display the hold display corresponding to the four hold game times (hereinafter, also referred to as the second hold game time display).

Further, as shown in FIG. 30B, on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variation display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that displays and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special symbol unit 37. A unit Sync2 is provided. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 blinks, and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, the first symbol display unit 37a is displayed. 1 Synchronous display unit Sync1 lights up. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronous display unit Sync2 blinks, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronous display is displayed. The unit Sync2 lights up and displays.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first reserved display area Ds1, the second reserved display area Ds2, the first synchronous display unit Sync1, and the second synchronous display unit Sync2. Although the configuration is used, a configuration may be adopted in which the display surface 41a does not display a part or all of these displays.

B2. Electrical configuration of gaming machines:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes a voice emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a program recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may have a part of the function which MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a DC stable 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the required operating power by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, and the like, and supplies the power supply device 85 to each device. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, a general winning opening 32, a first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), a second starting port 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, Various detection sensors provided in various entrances and through gates such as the variable winning device 54 are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entry port, and the game ball passes through the through gate. Judge whether or not it has been done. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) and the second starting port 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a general electric accessory drive unit 53c that opens and closes the ordinary electric accessory 53, a variable winning drive unit 54c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54, and a main display unit. 45 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 54c so that the opening / closing door 54b is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric accessory opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the general electric accessory driving unit 53c so that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened. Further, in each game, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45. The display control of unit 39 is executed.

Further, the payout control device 70 and the voice emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the first starting port 33 (1st starting port 33 ( When the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b) is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the second start is performed. When the entry of the game ball into the mouth 34 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes according to the amount of rotation operation. The game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the voice emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And controls the display control device 100. Further, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the voice emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. , Whether or not reach is generated, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed in a variable manner. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal display symbol or the second liquid crystal display symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game round time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 wins a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot types, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and fluctuated.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for whether or not to open the ordinary electric accessory 53.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reserved information storage area 64b is provided with a first reserved area Ra and a second reserved area Rb. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball. And each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the first hold area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b in time series. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 It is stored in the holding area Rb in chronological order.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 1199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b, and is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. Be remembered.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first hold area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is matched with the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it becomes. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. Whether or not it will be a big hit is determined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). ) Or, the game balls move to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set at the timing of entering the game ball when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. NS.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set to the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). 1 It is stored in the holding area Ra, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined whether or not After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second hold area Rb is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined whether or not However, when the result of the winning lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some combinations of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed and the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable manner in that state. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 30B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol string Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol string Z3. In the situation where the reach line is formed and the reach line is formed, the symbol is varied and displayed in the symbol row Z2 to reach the reach. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, with the reach line formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. A combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. Further, when the reach effect is performed or whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed before the reach display is performed, the reach random number counter C3 or other counters are used to determine. You may.

Next, the details of the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation display on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 465, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b. After that, in the execution area 64e for the electric accessory, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the normal electric accessory 53 to the open state by using the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is maintained in the closed state.

At least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the variable type counter CS is the special information in the present invention. Corresponds to. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the pass / fail table will be described. The hit / fail table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and a high probability mode set as a lottery mode for the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the low probability mode, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to and the high probability mode is used. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the first hold area of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). A hit / fail table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in Ra and a jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. The pass / fail table is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a pass / fail table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a pass / fail table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a pass / fail table for the second start port (low probability mode). The four hit / fail tables (for the probability mode) and the hit / miss table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the first starting port. FIG. 33 (a) shows a pass / fail table for the first start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 33 (b) shows a pass / fail table for the first start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 33A, four values 0 to 3 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting port. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values of 0 to 3 are out of order. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port. Has been done. Then, among the values from 0 to 1199, the values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are out of order. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the second starting port. FIG. 34 (a) shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 34 (b) shows a hit / miss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), four values 0 to 3 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values of 0 to 3 are out of order. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port. Has been done. Then, among the values from 0 to 1199, the values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are out of order. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as jackpots are arbitrary.

Although it is not adopted in the winning / failing table in this embodiment, a "small hit" may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The "small hit" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger a transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode, although it serves as an opportunity to shift to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 54 is opened and closed. On the other hand, "disengagement" is a result of success or failure that does not trigger the transition of the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger the transition of the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following four modes or modes.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening and closing the opening / closing door of the variable winning device in the opening / closing execution mode
(2) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device in the opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (low probability mode or high probability mode)
(4) Mode of support mode after end of open / close execution mode

As a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of types of opening / closing patterns (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “opening / closing patterns”) of the opening / closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54 are provided for each type of jackpot. One type of opening / closing pattern may be set correspondingly. In the present embodiment, one type of opening / closing pattern is set correspondingly for each type of jackpot, and the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing door 54b is different for each opening / closing pattern. The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 54b in this embodiment will be described later.

In addition, as an aspect of opening / closing control of the variable winning device in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of game balls (winning) in the variable winning device 54 from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode is relative. The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so as to be high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 54b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 5 seconds have passed or until the number of game balls entered into the opening / closing door 54b is 7. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 54b in the opening / closing execution mode should be set to continue until 1.6 seconds have passed or until the number of balls entered into the opening / closing door 54b is 7. Can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 54b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of ball entry into the variable winning device from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 54b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the variable winning device 54 is not substantially won. In this embodiment, the low-frequency winning mode is not provided, and the high-frequency winning mode is set for all jackpots.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 35 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 35 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), and is referred to at the time of the second starting port. The distribution table for use is referred to at the time of a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 35 (a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). 16R probability variation jackpot B, 8R probability variation jackpot A, and 8R normal jackpot A are set as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 4" corresponds to 16R probability variation jackpot B, "5 to 19" corresponds to 8R probability variation jackpot A, and " "20-39" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot A.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. Further, in the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the high frequency support mode B continues until the next big hit is won. .. The details of the support mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

In the 8R probability variation jackpot A, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. Further, in the 8R probability variation jackpot A, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A, and the high frequency support mode A continues until the next big hit is won. ..

In the 8R normal jackpot A, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. Further, in the 8R normal jackpot A, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A, and the game times end 100 times after the high frequency support mode A starts. The high-frequency support mode A is executed until the game is completed, and when the game rounds are completed 100 times, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode A to the low-frequency support mode.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 35 (b), the distribution table for the second starting port has a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. 16R probability variation jackpot B, 8R probability variation jackpot B, and 8R normal jackpot B are set. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 9" corresponds to 16R probability variation jackpot B, "10 to 19" corresponds to 8R probability variation jackpot B, and " "20-39" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot B.

Since the 16R probability variation jackpot B has been described in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 35, the description here will be omitted.

In the 8R probability variation jackpot B, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. Further, in the 8R probability variation jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the high frequency support mode B continues until the next big hit is won. ..

In the 8R normal jackpot B, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. Further, in the 8R normal jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the low probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the game round ends 100 times after the high frequency support mode B starts. The high-frequency support mode B is executed until the game is completed, and when the game rounds are completed 100 times, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode B to the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is the game ball to the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). There is a difference between the case where the jackpot is based on the entry of the ball and the case where the jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player. It is provided.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to cause the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b to stop and display the segment display. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the electric service opening lottery and the support mode will be described.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / failing table (winning / failing table for electric accessory opening lottery) used when executing the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 36A shows a winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, are 0 and 1. The value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory opening lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. .. When the electric service opening lottery is won, the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. The mode of opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 when the low frequency support mode is executed will be described later.

FIG. 36B shows a winning / failing table (for high-frequency support mode) for the electric accessory opening lottery used in the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A, high-frequency support mode B). As shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for high frequency support mode), 462 electric accessory opening counters C4, which are the electric accessory opening winning counters, have a value of 0 to 461. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is disengaged. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory opening lottery is executed, there is a probability of 231/233 that the electric accessory opening is won. .. When the electric service opening lottery is won, the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. The mode of opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 during execution of the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B will be described later.

As explained above, the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A, high-frequency support mode B) makes it easier to win the electric role open lottery than the low-frequency support mode, depending on the winning / failing table for the electric accessory opening lottery. It is set to be.

Next, the details of the support mode that the pachinko machine 10 can execute will be described.

FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the types of support modes that the pachinko machine 10 can execute. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 can execute three types of support modes: low frequency support mode, high frequency support mode A, and high frequency support mode B.

[Low frequency support mode]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the low frequency support mode, the winning probability of the electric service open lottery is 1/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electric service open lottery is 10 seconds. That is, it takes 10 seconds from the start of the electric service open lottery to the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol and the stop display of the normal symbol in order to notify the lottery result. Further, the time from the time when the fluctuation time ends when the electric service opening lottery is won until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball becomes able to circulate on the upper surface is 0.1 seconds. When the electric service opening lottery is won, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 (the time during which the movable piece 53a is maintained in a state of protruding from the game board 30) is 3 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed.

In the low frequency support mode, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the ball to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a mode in which game balls are distributed when the low frequency support mode is executed. In FIG. 38, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an open state when represented by a solid line.

When the player circulates the game ball so as to strike left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120, the game ball entering the opening 122 flows to the left by the distribution rotation unit 125. The road R1 and the right side flow path R2 are alternately distributed. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the game ball distributed to the left side flow path R1 flows out from the opening 123 and enters the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 38 (b), the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 passes through the through gate 35a and then flows out from the opening 124. In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a is low (winning probability: 1/233), and the normal electric accessory 53 is in the open state. The probability of becoming is low. Therefore, there is a high probability that the normal electric accessory 53 is closed when the game ball flows out from the opening 124, and the game ball that has flowed out from the opening 124 enters the first starting port 33b. That is, in the low frequency support mode, in most cases, the game ball that has entered the distribution mechanism 120 enters the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b, and enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33 (first). The game round is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the start port 33a and the first start port 33b). Further, in the low frequency support mode, even if the game ball is won in the electric service opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a, the fluctuation time of the electric service opening lottery is 10 seconds. Moreover, since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b to when it reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 is about 0.3 seconds, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35a that triggered the winning. However, the ball does not enter the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53 which has been opened by the winning. A game ball that has reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in the open state may enter the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53.

Further, if the game ball is passed through the through gate 35b by hitting the right in the low frequency support mode, the game ball is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. The probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery is low (winning probability: 1/233), and the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be in the open state is low. Therefore, it is unlikely that the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b will enter the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b, and the second start port 34, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b will flow down as it is. Enter the ball at the out port 43. Temporarily, in the low-frequency support mode, a right-handed hit is made to pass the game ball through the through gate 35b so that the game ball passes through the through gate 35b, and the electric service opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b is executed. Even if the player wins the game, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the low frequency support mode is 3 seconds, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 is the second. Since the time required to reach the starting port 34 is about 5.0 seconds, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is set before the game ball circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a reaches the second starting port 34. The game ball that has closed and triggered the winning of the electric service opening lottery will not enter the second starting port 34.

[High frequency support mode A]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the high frequency support mode A, the winning probability of the electric service open lottery is 231/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electric service open lottery is 0.05 seconds. That is, it takes 0.05 seconds from the start of the electric service open lottery to the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol and the stop display of the normal symbol in order to notify the lottery result. Further, as described above, the time from the time when the fluctuation time ends when the electric service opening lottery is won until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball becomes able to circulate on the upper surface is 0. It is 1 second. When the electric service opening lottery is won, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 3 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed.

In the high frequency support mode A, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the ball left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a mode in which game balls are distributed when the high-frequency support mode A is executed. In FIG. 39, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an open state when represented by a solid line.

When the player circulates the game ball so as to strike left and enter the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122), the game ball entering the opening 122 is left by the distribution rotation unit 125. It is alternately distributed to the flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2. As shown in FIG. 39A, the game ball distributed to the left side flow path R1 flows out from the opening 123 and enters the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 39B, the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 passes through the through gate 35a and then flows out from the opening 124. In the high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a is high (winning probability: 231/233), and the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened. The probability of becoming a state is high. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and wins the electric service opening lottery, the normal electric accessory 53 is opened when the game ball flows out from the opening 124. In order to achieve this, the fluctuation time of the electric service opening lottery in the high frequency support mode A is set to 0.05 seconds. Further, the time from the time when the fluctuation time ends when the electric service opening lottery is won until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball becomes able to circulate on the upper surface is 0.1 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a to when it reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 0.3 seconds. That is, from the time (0.3 seconds) from the time when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a to the time when it reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the electric service is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a. From the time when the fluctuation time of the open lottery (0.05 seconds) and the fluctuation time when the electric service open lottery is won ends, until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can flow on the upper surface. Since the sum value (0.15 seconds) of the time (0.1 seconds) is shorter, when the electric role opening lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 53 when the game ball flows out from the opening 124. Is open, and the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 normally circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the electric accessory 53.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to enable the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 to flow through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting port 34, a normal electric combination in the high frequency support mode A The opening time of the object 53 is set to 3.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time until the game ball that flows out from the opening 124 and reaches the movable piece 53a flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting port 34 is It is 2.0 seconds. Therefore, the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and enters the second starting port 34. As described above, in the high-frequency support mode A, when the game ball is distributed to the right flow path R2 as compared with the low-frequency support mode, the game ball is second-started with the assistance of the normal electric accessory 53. There is a high probability that the ball will enter the mouth 34. In the high-frequency support mode A, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 is 3 seconds, but since it closes when one game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is distributed to the right flow path R2. When the game ball reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 immediately after the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed, the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 enters the first starting port 33b. Further, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34 and another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, the electric accessory 53 of the game ball is normally closed. The ball does not enter the second starting port 34, but flows further downstream. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode A, not all the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 enter the second starting port 34. Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment passes through the through gate 35b when the player hits the right side and distributes the game ball so as to pass through the through gate 35b in the high frequency support mode A. It is configured so that the game ball that has reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 does not enter the second starting port 34. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting port 34. The average value of the time required for this is 5.0 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode A is set to 3.0 seconds. Therefore, even if the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the open ordinary electric accessory 53, the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, so that the game Since the ball is normally discharged from the electric accessory 53 before reaching the second starting port 34 and flows further downward, the ball does not enter the second starting port 34. Therefore, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the distribution mode of the game balls to be inserted into the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 is the distribution mode of the game balls that maximizes the profit of the player.

[High frequency support mode B]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the high frequency support mode B, the winning probability of the electric service open lottery is 231/233, and the fluctuation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electric service open lottery is 0.05 seconds. That is, it takes 0.05 seconds from the start of the electric service open lottery to the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol and the stop display of the normal symbol in order to notify the lottery result. Further, as described above, the time from the end of the fluctuation time when the electric service open lottery is won until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball becomes circulated on the upper surface is 0. It is 1 second. When the electric service opening lottery is won, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 6 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed.

In the high frequency support mode B, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to hit the right side and pass through the through gate 35b.

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a mode in which game balls are distributed when the high-frequency support mode B is executed. In FIG. 40, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an open state when represented by a solid line.

When the player hits the right side and distributes the game ball so as to pass through the through gate 35b, the electric service opening lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. In the high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b is high (winning probability: 231/233), and the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened. The probability of becoming a state is high. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b and wins the electric service opening lottery, when the game ball passing through the through gate 35b reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the normal electric motor is used. The fluctuation time of the electric service opening lottery in the high frequency support mode B is set to 0.05 seconds so that the accessory 53 is in the open state. Further, the time from the time when the fluctuation time ends when the electric service opening lottery is won until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball becomes able to circulate on the upper surface is 0.1 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b to when it reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 0.3 seconds. That is, from the time (0.3 seconds) from the time when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53, the electric service is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. From the time when the fluctuation time of the open lottery (0.05 seconds) and the fluctuation time when the electric service open lottery is won ends, until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can flow on the upper surface. Since the sum value (0.15 seconds) of the time (0.1 seconds) is shorter, when the electric service open lottery is won, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the normal electric accessory 53. At that time, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open, and the game ball that has reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the ordinary electric accessory 53.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to enable the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the ordinary electric accessory 53, flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting port 34. The opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode B is set to 6.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 to circulate on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting port 34. The average value is 5.0 seconds. Therefore, the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and enters the second starting port 34. In the high frequency support mode B, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53 is 6.0 seconds, but since it closes when one game ball enters the second starting port 34, it passes through the through gate 35b. If the game ball reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 immediately after the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed, the game ball flows down as it is. That is, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34. Further, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34 and another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, the electric accessory 53 of the game ball is normally closed. The ball does not enter the second starting port 34, but flows further downstream. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode B, not all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35b enter the second starting port 34.

As described above, in the high frequency support B, when the player hits the right side, the game ball can be inserted only into the second starting port 34 with a high probability. As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port and the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 35, a big hit is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. The expected value of the privilege given when a big hit is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is higher than the expected value of the privilege given in the case of the above. If, in the high-frequency support mode B, the game balls are circulated so as to strike left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120, the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 Since the game balls enter alternately with and, the expectation of the privilege given when the jackpot is won is higher than the case where the game ball is entered only in the second starting port 34 with a high probability by hitting right. The value will be lower. Therefore, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, the distribution mode of the game ball that strikes right and passes through the through gate 35b is the distribution mode of the game ball that maximizes the profit of the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are distributed so as to maximize the profit of the player, the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port) A state in which the game ball enters only 33b) (a state in the low frequency support mode), a state in which the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 alternately (a state in the high frequency support mode A). ), A state in which the game ball enters only the second starting port 34 (a state in the high frequency support mode B), and three states can be created.

B3. Flow of the game Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in step F101, when the player starts the game, the lottery mode in the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. At this time, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect of urging the player to strike left and allow the game ball to enter the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the low frequency support mode, in most cases, the game ball that has entered the distribution mechanism 120 enters the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b, and the first start. The game round is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). The state of step F101 is executed until a big hit is won in the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) (F102: NO). ).

In the state of step F101, if a jackpot is won in the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) (F102: YES), the jackpot is won. A round game according to the type is executed (F103). For example, if the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot B, the variable winning device 54 executes an opening / closing operation to execute a round game for 16 rounds, and if the jackpot type is 8R probability variation jackpot A and 8R normal jackpot A, The variable winning device 54 executes an opening / closing operation, and a round game for eight rounds is executed.

After the end of the round game, the game shifts to a different game state for each type of jackpot that was won earlier. If the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process proceeds to step F111. That is, in the case of the jackpot type that shifts to the state of the high frequency support mode B after the end of the round game, the process proceeds to step F111.

In step F104, if the jackpot type is not jackpot B (F104: NO), the process proceeds to step F105. That is, it is a case of a jackpot type that shifts to the state of high frequency support mode A after the end of the round game. Specifically, the game to the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). If the 8R probability variation jackpot A and the 8R normal jackpot A are won in the game round executed with the ball entering, the process proceeds to step F105.

In step F105, if the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109, and if it is not a probabilistic jackpot, that is, if it is a normal jackpot (for example, 8R normal jackpot A), (F105: NO). ), Proceed to step F106.

In step F106, after the end of the round game (F103), the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect of urging the player to strike left and allow the game ball to enter the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls that have entered the distribution mechanism 120 alternately alternate between the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a) and the second starting port 34. Enter the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, in the order in which the game balls enter each start port, the game times triggered by the entry of the game balls are executed. Therefore, in a state where the game ball alternately enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a) and the second start port 34, the ball enters the first start port 33 as an opportunity. The game times to be played and the game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are alternately executed.

In the high-frequency support mode A in the state of step F106, the game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) or the second start port 34. Continue until it is executed 100 times (F107: N0 → F108: NO), and if the jackpot is not won by the time the game is executed 100 times (F107: NO → F108: YES), go to step F101. Return to the indicated state. That is, it returns to the state of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the state of step F106, the game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) or the second start port 34 are executed 100 times. If the jackpot is won by the time (F107: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round game according to the type of jackpot is executed.

In step F105, if the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109.

In step F109, after the round game (F103) is completed, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect of urging the player to strike left and allow the game ball to enter the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

The state of step F109 is the high frequency support mode A. As described above, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls that have entered the distribution mechanism 120 alternately alternate between the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a) and the second starting port 34. Enter the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, in the order in which the game balls enter each start port, the game times triggered by the entry of the game balls are executed. Therefore, in a state where the game ball alternately enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a) and the second start port 34, the ball enters the first start port 33 as an opportunity. The game times to be played and the game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are alternately executed.

Since the state of step F109 is the high probability mode, the state of the high frequency support mode A continues until the jackpot is won in the executed game times (F110: NO).

In the state of step F109, when a big hit is won in the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) or the second start port 34. (F110: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round game according to the type of jackpot is executed.

In step F104, if the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process proceeds to step F111. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation jackpot B is won in the game round executed when the game ball enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b), or the first 2 When the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the 8R probability variation jackpot B, and the 8R normal jackpot B are won in the game round executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34, the process proceeds to step F111.

In step F111, if the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot B (F111: YES), the process proceeds to step F112.

In step F112, after the round game (F103) is completed, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect of urging the player to hit the ball to the right and allow the game ball to enter the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

In the state of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b enters the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53. Therefore, the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed.

Since step F112 is a high-probability mode, the state of high-frequency support mode B continues until a jackpot is won in the executed game times (F113: NO).

In the state of step F112, if a jackpot is won in the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 (F113: YES), the process proceeds to step F103 and a round according to the type of jackpot. The game is executed.

In step F111, if the jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot B (F111: NO), the process proceeds to step F114.

In step F114, after the end of the round game (F103), the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect of urging the player to strike left and allow the game ball to enter the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the state of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b enters the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53. Therefore, the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is executed.

The high-frequency support mode B in the state of step F114 continues until the game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are executed 100 times (F115: N0 → F116: NO), and the game is played. If the jackpot is not won by the time the times are executed 100 times (F115: NO → F116: YES), the state returns to the state shown in step F101. That is, it returns to the state of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the state of step F114, if a jackpot is won by the time the game rounds triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 are executed 100 times (F115: YES), step F103 is performed. Proceed, and a round game is executed according to the type of jackpot.

The flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above. As described in the flow of the game, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33a, first) when the game balls are distributed so as to maximize the profit of the player. A state in which the game ball enters only the 1 start port 33b) (low frequency support mode state), and a state in which the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 alternately (high frequency support mode). The game progresses while shifting between the three states (state A) and the state in which the game ball enters only the second starting port 34 (state of high frequency support mode B).

Here, the features of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects of the features will be described by comparison with conventional pachinko machines. First, when a winning lottery (including a big hit winning and a small winning winning if a small winning winning is set) is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port. The expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) given to the player is set as the first privilege expected value, and the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting port is won (big hit winning, big hit winning, In addition, the expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) given when the small hit winning is set (including the small winning winning) is set as the second privilege expected value. In addition, the expected value of the privilege given when winning in the normal time is set as the expected value of the privilege in the normal time, and the expected value of the privilege given when winning in the high frequency support mode is the expected value of the privilege in the case of high support. And.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a “conventional pachinko machine”) provided with a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to a first start port and a second start port. In the conventional pachinko machine, in the initial normal state (for example, low probability mode and low frequency support mode) when the game is started, the game balls are distributed so as to reach the distribution mechanism to reach the first start port and the second start. The game balls are alternately inserted into the mouth. Then, when the mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory) operates frequently, so that the game ball is inserted into the second starting port with a high probability without going through the sorting means. Let me.

In the conventional pachinko machine, if the expected value of the privilege at the time of high support is higher than the expected value of the privilege at the time of normal and the difference is to be increased, it is inevitably the second to increase the expected value of the privilege at the time of high support. It is necessary to increase the expected value of the privilege, but if the expected value of the second privilege is increased, the expected value of the privilege at normal times also increases (in the normal state, a game ball enters the first start port and the second start port). Because the ball is hit and the lottery is executed). Further, even if the first privilege expected value is reduced, the normal privilege expected value is the average of the first privilege expected value and the second privilege expected value, so the effect of reducing the first privilege expected value is It gets smaller.

Furthermore, if there is a regulation on the size of benefits that can be granted per unit time, if the expected value of benefits at normal times is relatively large, the expected value of benefits at high support will be adjusted in order to adjust within the range of the regulation. Needs to be small. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the expected value of the privilege at the normal time and the expected value of the privilege at the time of high support. In other words, among the game states excluding the open / close execution mode, it is not possible to provide a large swing in the profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. As a result, the player's expectation when shifting from the normal state (normal game state, state with the lowest expected value of privilege) to the high frequency support mode (best game state, state with the highest expected value of privilege) is increased. Cannot be evoked.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment distributes the game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, but the game balls enter only the first starting port 33a with a high probability. By setting the first privilege expected value low, the normal privilege expected value can be lowered. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, when the player hits the right side, the game ball enters only the second starting port 34 with a high probability, so that the expected value of the second privilege should be set high. Therefore, the expected value of the privilege at the time of high support in the high frequency support B can be increased. That is, among the game states excluding the open / close execution mode, it is possible to provide a large swing range in the profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the game balls are alternately entered into the first start port 33a and the second start port 34. The expected value of benefits during high support (at high frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between the expected value of benefits during normal times and the expected value of benefits during high support (at high frequency support mode B), and is in the normal state → high frequency support. When the game progresses in the flow of the game such as mode A → high frequency support mode B, the value of the expected privilege value to be given is gradually increasing, and among the game states excluding the open / close execution mode, it is normal. There can be a large swing in the profits that the player can obtain between the gaming state and the best gaming state.

Furthermore, if there is a regulation on the size of the benefits that can be granted per unit time, by setting the expected value of the first benefit low, the size of the benefits that can be granted per unit time as a whole can be increased. It is possible to adjust, and it is possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first privilege expected value and the second privilege expected value is large. That is, among the game states excluding the open / close execution mode, the difference in profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state can be given per unit time while ensuring a large swing range. It becomes easy to adjust the size of various benefits within the limits of regulation.

The features of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects of the features are compared with a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) provided with a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to the first starting port and the second starting port. As described above, the effect is not only effective for the conventional pachinko machines illustrated above, but also for pachinko machines having two or more ball-entry portions that trigger different types of lottery. The effect is achieved.

B4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

In step S20101, the reading process of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S20102.

In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S20103.

In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each of them is used. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S20104. The value of the variable type counter CS is updated in the normal processing (FIG. 48) described later.

In step S20104, a ball entry process for the start port accompanying the entry into the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) and the second start port 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, the process proceeds to step S20105.

In step S20105, the ball entry process for through ball accompanying the ball entry into the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is executed. The details of the ball entry process for through in step S20105 will be described later. After executing step S20105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the start port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 42: S20104).

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting port. In step S20201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) (starting prize) is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. Judge by state. If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S2203.

In step S2203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). I do. Then, the process proceeds to step S20204.

In step S20204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the number of holds based on the ball entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). Then, the process proceeds to step S2020.

If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205 and the game ball. Determines whether or not the ball has entered the second starting port 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

If it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is terminated.

In step S20207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S20208.

In step S20208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the winning of the second start port 34. Then, the process proceeds to step S2020.

In step S20209, it is determined whether or not the start hold number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S2020, if the starting hold number N is not less than the upper limit value (S2020: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S2020, if the start hold number N is less than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, 1 is added to the start hold number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step S20211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved quantity CRN). The total hold quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first start hold quantity RaN and the second start hold quantity RbN. Then, the process proceeds to step S20212.

In step S20212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42), and the variable type counter CS updated in the normal processing (FIG. 48) are set. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding hold areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of holds in which 1 is added in step S20210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the jackpot random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42), and Each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. When the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42). Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the second hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. After executing step S20212, the process proceeds to step S20213.

In step S20213, the first determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS, and the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the winning lottery and the jackpot. This is a process for determining the type of the player, whether or not the reach has occurred, the fluctuation time of the game times, and the like before the pending information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the pre-determination process will be described later. After executing step S20213, the process proceeds to step S20214.

In step S20214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment processing executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS. ) Is set as a hold command.

The hold command is based on the fact that a ball has entered the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) or the second start port 34 and the hold information acquired based on the ball entry. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the determination result (first determination information) by the first determination process before the hold information becomes the target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: step S20703) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), the symbol display device 41 A command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 according to the increase in the number of holds is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the second start port 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 displays the number of holds in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing in response to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<First judgment process>
Next, the first determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 43: S20213) for the ball entry process for the starting port.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the pre-determination process. As described above, in the pre-judgment process, based on the hold information, the hold information is mainly used for determining whether or not the winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether or not a reach has occurred, determining the fluctuation time of the game times, and the like. This is a process to be executed before the target of the winning lottery by the control device 60.

In step S20301, the jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not a winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not a reach has occurred. The details of the jackpot / reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S20301, the process proceeds to step S20302.

In step S20302, the variable time information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process for determining the fluctuation time of the game times. The details of the fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step S20302, the final determination process ends.

<Big hit / reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot / reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 44: S20301) of the pre-determination process.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the jackpot / reach information acquisition process. In step S20401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 43) is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S2402, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the pre-judgment process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and the presence or absence of the probability variation jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current ball. By determining, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round is determined.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as a game round, the process proceeds to step S2403 and the winning / failing table is stored. Refer to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a. After that, the process proceeds to step S20405, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S2402, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game round (S20402: NO), the process proceeds to step S20404 and the high probability mode is performed. As a result of referring to the winning / failing table for the game, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S20405, and as a result of referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

If it is determined in step S20405 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S20405: YES), the process proceeds to step S20406, and the ball is stored in the storage area by entering the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S20407, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2, which is the target of distribution this time, is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). Refers to the distribution table for the first start port, and refers to the distribution table for the second start port when the ball is acquired based on the ball entering the second start port 34. After executing step S20407, the process proceeds to step S20408.

In step S20408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S20408 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S20408: YES), the process proceeds to step S20409, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20408 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S20408: NO), the process proceeds to step S20410, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20405 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S20405: NO), the process proceeds to step S20411, and the ball enters the start port this time to enter the storage area. The value of the stored reach random number counter C3 is read out. After that, the process proceeds to step S20412, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S20413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step S20413 that the reach generation is supported (S20413: YES), the process proceeds to step S20414, and the reach generation information is stored in the prior determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the first determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20413 that the reach generation is not supported (S20413: NO), the pre-determination process is terminated as it is.

<Variable time information acquisition process>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 44: S20302) of the prior determination process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation time information acquisition process. In step S20501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the ball entering the starting port in the ball entering process for the starting port (FIG. 43) is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S20502.

In step S20502, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery related to this game is won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the jackpot / reach information acquisition process, and if it is a jackpot (S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S20503.

In step S20503, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step S20503, the process proceeds to step S20507.

In step S20507, the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. After that, the present variable time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20502 that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a big hit (step S20502: NO), the process proceeds to step S20504 to determine whether or not reach occurs. If it is determined in step S20504 that reach will occur (S20504: YES), the process proceeds to step S20505.

In step S20505, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step S20507, the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the fluctuation time information acquisition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20504 that no reach does not occur in the current game round (step S20504: NO), the process proceeds to step S20506, and the variation time table for non-reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is displayed. With reference to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S20507, the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the fluctuation time information acquisition processing is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. There is. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN when determining the variation time of the game times. Is different.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, in addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reserved pieces CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be set. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start pending number RbN increases. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the second start reserved numbers RbN increases, or becomes constant without depending on the respective reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach does not occur so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when the reach occurs, and the fluctuation time which is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time which is difficult to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot and the time of the missed reach may be different. good. Further, the fluctuation time table for the probabilistic jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the normal jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the deviation reach, and the fluctuation time table for the complete deviation may be set individually.

<Through ball entry process>
Next, the ball entry process for through will be described. The ball entry process for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 42: step S20105).

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for through. In step S20601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed) through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). If it is determined in step S20601 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (S20601: YES), the process proceeds to step S20602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20601 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (S20601: NO), the ball entry process for this through is terminated.

In step S20602, it is determined whether or not the electric service processing execution flag is ON. The electric service processing in-execution flag is turned on when the electric motor open lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), and the electric motor open lottery is set. If the lottery result is out of order, it is turned off after setting the off display, and if the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery is a hit, the hit display is set and the ordinary electric accessory 53 is released. It is turned off after the processing is completed. Hereinafter, the electric service opening lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), the display of the lottery result (hit or miss) executed in connection with the lottery, and the display of the lottery result (hit or miss), and The opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that is executed in the case of a hit is also called an electric function process. In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) does not suspend the passage of the game ball. That is, during the period in which the electric service processing triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is being executed, the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is newly executed. ), Even if the game ball enters the ball, the electric service processing triggered by the entry is not executed.

If it is determined in step S20602 that the electric service processing executing flag is not ON (S20602: NO), the process proceeds to step S20603 and the electric service processing executing flag is turned ON. After executing step S20603, the process proceeds to step S20604. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20602 that the electric service processing executing flag is ON (S20602: YES), the ball entry process for this through is terminated.

In step S20604, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42) is moved to the execution area 64e for the electric accessory. After that, the ball entry process for through is completed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20701, the start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S20702.

In step S20702, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demo movie for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step S20703.

In step S20703, output data such as the start-up command set in step S20702 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to the effect such as a start-up command, a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After executing step S20703, the process proceeds to step S20704.

In step S20704, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variable type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S20705.

In step S20705, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20706. In step S20706, a game turn control process for controlling the game in each game turn is executed. In the game time control process, a winning lottery, setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step S20706, the process proceeds to step S20707.

In step S20707, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S20708.

In step S20708, the electric service support process for driving and controlling the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 53 is in the open state. The details of the processing for electric service support will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S20709.

In step S20709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step S20703). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step S20709 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S20709: NO), in steps S20710 and S20711 until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S20710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S20711, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20709 that a predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (S20709: YES), the process returns to step S20703 and each process from step S20703 to step S20708 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step S20703 to step S20708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be randomly updated by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 48: S20706) of the normal process.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step S20801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the open / close execution mode and turned off at the end of the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step S20801 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S20801: YES), it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress, and the game times control is performed without executing any of the processes after step S20802. End the process. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game rotation is not started regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the special figure start port 51. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S20801: NO), the process proceeds to step S20802.

In step S20802, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is in the variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64 g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when starting the variable display for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display ends.

If it is determined in step S20802 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S20802: NO), the process proceeds to the process for starting the game round in steps S20803 to S20805. In step S20803, it is determined whether or not the reserved number CRN is “0”. When the reserved number CRN is "0", it means that the reserved number is "0" for any of the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) and the second starting port 34. means. Therefore, if it is determined in step S20803 that the reserved number CRN is "0" (S20803: YES), the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20803 that the reserved number CRN is not "0" (S20803: NO), the process proceeds to step S20804.

In step S20804, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20805. The details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S20805, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later. After executing step S20805, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20802 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S20802: YES), the process for advancing the game rounds in steps S20806 to S20815 is executed.

In step S20806, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game times has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S20806, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 52) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step S20806 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S20806: NO), the process proceeds to step S20807 to execute the fluctuation display process. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode in the symbol display unit related to the current game round. After executing step S20807, the game times control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20806 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S20806: YES), the process proceeds to step S20808 to execute the fluctuation end processing. In the variation end processing, the symbol display unit is displayed so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the symbol display unit determined in the variation start processing (FIG. 51) described later is displayed on the symbol display unit related to the current game round. Display control. After executing step S20808, the process proceeds to step S20809.

In step S20809, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (16R probability variation jackpot B flag, 8R probability variation jackpot B flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag A, 8R normal jackpot A flag in the present embodiment) is ON. .. If any of the jackpot flags is ON in step S20809 (S20809: YES), the process proceeds to step S20810.

In step S20810, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game times control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S20809, if none of the jackpot flags is ON (S20809: NO), the process proceeds to step S20811.

In step S20811, the value of the game count counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. After executing step S20811, the process proceeds to step S20812.

In step S20812, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S20812 that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S20812: NO), the game times control process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S20812 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S20812: YES), the process proceeds to step S20813, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter PNC is 0.

If it is determined in step S20813 that the value of the game count counter PNC is not 0 (S20813: NO), the game count control process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S20813 that the value of the game count counter PNC is 0 (S20813: YES), the process proceeds to step S20814, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S20815, and the low frequency support mode command is set. The low-frequency support mode command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: step S20703) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the support mode has changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and executes an effect corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step S20815, the game times control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 49: S20804) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. In step S20901, it is determined whether or not the hold area to be processed for executing the data setting process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 32) in time series, the hold information stored first (hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb (information), which is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 32) in time series. If it is stored in the hold area before the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in time series is earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series. If the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S20901, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

If it is determined in step S20901 that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra (step S20901: YES), the data setting process for the first hold area in steps S20902 to S20907 is executed. On the other hand, in step S20901, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step S20901: NO). ), The data setting process for the second reserved area in steps S20908 to S20913 is executed.

In step S20902, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold number RaN in the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step S20903 and the total hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S20904. In step S20904, the data stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S20905.

In step S20905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first hold area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S20905, the process proceeds to step S20906.

In step S20906, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for identifying whether the target for starting the variation display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, the process proceeds to step S20907.

In step S20907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first hold area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first start port 33. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S20907 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

In step S20901, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step S20901: NO). Step S20908 proceeds.

In step S20908, the number of second start hold numbers RbN in the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S20909. In step S20909, the total number of reserved CRNs is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S20910, in which the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process proceeds to step S20911.

In step S20911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area. After executing step S20911, the process proceeds to step S20912.

In step S20912, when the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to step S20913.

In step S20913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the voice emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, the information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the second hold area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S20913 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The voice emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 49: S20805) of the game turn control process.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After that, it is turned off when the normal jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S21001 that the mode is in the high probability mode (S21001: YES), the process proceeds to step S21002.

In step S21002, the winning / failing determination is performed with reference to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 33 (b). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S21004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21001 that the mode is not in the high probability mode (S21001: NO), the process proceeds to step S21003.

In step S21003, the pass / fail determination is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 33 (a). Is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S21004.

In step S21004, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination (winning lottery) in step S21002 or step S21003 is a big hit winning. In step S21004, when the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit (S21004: YES), in step S21005-step S21012, in order to set the process for setting the game result in the case of the big hit winning and the stop result. Executes the processing of.

In step S21005, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S21005 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S21005: NO), the process proceeds to step S21006, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 35 (a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot B, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot A, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot A. Judge whether or not.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21005 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S21005: YES), the process proceeds to step S21007, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 35 (b)). The distribution is determined with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the numerical range of the 8R probability variation jackpot B, or the 8R normal jackpot B. do. After executing the process of step S21006 or step S21007. The process proceeds to step S21008.

In step S21008, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step S21008 that the game result is a probabilistic jackpot (S21008: YES), the process proceeds to step S21009.

In step S21009, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probabilistic jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round in which the probabilistic jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21009, the process proceeds to step S21010.

In step S21010, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot B, the 16R probability variation jackpot B flag is turned ON, if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot B, the 8R probability variation jackpot B flag is ON, and if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot A, it is ON. 8R Probability change jackpot A flag is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step S21016.

On the other hand, in step S21008, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is not a probabilistic jackpot (S2008: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step Proceed to S21011.

In step S21011, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot varies depending on which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 can be obtained. It is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21011, the process proceeds to step S21012.

In step S21012, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is 8R normal jackpot B, the 8R normal jackpot B flag is turned ON, and when it is 8R normal jackpot A, the 8R normal jackpot A flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S21016.

In step S21004, if the result of the big hit lottery in step S21002 or step S21003 is not a big hit (S21004: NO), the process proceeds to step S21013 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the game. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is one with the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine if you are doing it.

If it is determined in step S21013 that a reach will occur in the game round (S21013: YES), the process proceeds to step S21014.

In step S21014, the stop result setting process for reach is executed. In this game round, which is the stop result for reach, it is a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to end the variable display. be. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21014, the process proceeds to step S21016.

If it is determined in step S21013 that no reach does not occur in the game round (S21013: NO), the process proceeds to step S21015.

In step S21015, the stop result setting process for disconnection is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of disconnection is to end the variation display in the state where the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game time which is the disengagement result. It is a process for setting. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for when the stop result table is stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21015, the process proceeds to step S21016.

In step S21016, the fluctuation time setting process is executed. The fluctuation time setting process is to set the fluctuation time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on the presence / absence of a big hit and the presence / absence of reach. It is the processing of. The details of the fluctuation time setting process will be described later. After executing step S21016, the process proceeds to step S21017.

In step S21017, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S21017 that the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S21017: NO), the process proceeds to step S21018 and the first variation command is set. The command for the first variation indicates that the game round this time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). In addition to the information to be shown, the information on the presence / absence of the occurrence of reach and the information on the fluctuation time set in step S21016 are included.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21017 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S21017: YES), the process proceeds to step S21019 and the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S21016 are included. After executing step S21018 or step S21019, the process proceeds to step S21020.

In step S21020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of a jackpot, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence / absence of reach. That is, in the type command, as the information of the type of jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot B information, 8R probability variation jackpot B information, 8R probability variation jackpot A information, 8R normal jackpot B information, 8R normal jackpot A information, or , Information on the presence or absence of reach and information on the result of loss are included.

The variation command and the type command set in steps S21018 to S21020 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S21020, the process proceeds to step S21021.

In step S21021, among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is started to display the variation of the symbol. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is specified to be the second symbol display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S21021, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Fluctuating time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 51: S21016) of the variation start process.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a variation time setting process. In step S21011, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S21102.

In step S21102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is a winner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (S21102: YES), the process proceeds to step S21103.

In step S21103, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step S21107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S21102 that the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a win (S21102: NO), the process proceeds to step S21104 to determine whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. Since this process (S21104) is executed when the winning lottery related to the current game times is not won in step S21102, reach occurs among the game times not won in the winning lottery in step S21104. It is determined whether or not the game is a game. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach will occur (S21104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S21105. When specifying whether or not reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step S21105, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reaching is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S21107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S21104 that reach does not occur in the current game round (S21104: NO), the process proceeds to step S21106, and the variation time table for non-reach generation table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S21107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table increases as the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN increase. It is set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN when determining the variation time of the game times. Is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. However, in addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reserved pieces CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be set. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved quantity CRNs may be used, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reserved quantity CRNs is smaller. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start pending number RbN increases. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start hold number RaN increases, and when the second start hold number RbN is "1" or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the second start reserved numbers RbN increases, or becomes constant without depending on the respective reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach does not occur so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

Further, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when the reach occurs, and the fluctuation time which is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time which is difficult to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot and the time of the missed reach may be different. good. Further, the fluctuation time table for the probabilistic jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the normal jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the deviation reach, and the fluctuation time table for the complete deviation may be set individually.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 48: S20707) of the normal process.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening / closing processing period (at the beginning of the ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode, and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

If it is determined in step S2201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S22011: NO), the process proceeds to step S21220 to determine whether or not the open / close processing period flag is ON. As described above, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON when the gaming state is shifted to the open / close processing period, and is turned OFF when the open / close processing period is ended.

If it is determined in step S21202 that the open / close processing period flag is not ON (S21202: NO), the process proceeds to step S2123 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step S21203 that the opening period flag is not ON (S21203: NO), the process proceeds to step S21204 to determine whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is turned on when the game round that triggered the start of the open / close execution mode ends, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step S21204 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S21204: YES), the process proceeds to step S21205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21204 that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (S21204: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step S21205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. The high-probability mode flag is turned off in order to set the lottery mode during execution of the open / close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-probability mode. After executing step S21205, the process proceeds to step S21206.

In step S21206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. In order to change the support mode during execution of the open / close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step S21206, the process proceeds to step S21207.

In step S21207, the open / close execution mode start command is set. The open / close execution mode start command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the open / close execution mode is started when the jackpot is won. The open / close execution mode start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: step S20703) of the normal process. After executing step S21207, the process proceeds to step S21208.

In step S21208, the opening / closing scenario setting process is executed. The opening / closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening / closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 54b in the round game is set. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the opening / closing door 54b in the one-round game is 30 seconds. However, even 30 seconds before the opening / closing door 54b is opened, the opening / closing door 54b is closed when nine game balls enter the large winning opening 54a. In the present embodiment, such an opening pattern of the opening / closing door 54b is set in the opening / closing scenario. In the opening / closing scenario setting process, an opening / closing scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set. For example, in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot B, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 54b for 16 rounds is set in the opening / closing scenario, and in the case of 8R probability variation jackpot A, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 54b for 8 rounds is the opening / closing scenario. Is set to. After executing step S21208, the process proceeds to step S21209.

In step S21209, the opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as the opening time) in the special game state. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the opening timer counter area as the opening time. After executing step S21209, the process proceeds to step S21210.

In step S21210, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the jackpot type, and information on the jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode this time. The voice emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S21210, the process proceeds to step S21211, and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21203 that the opening period flag is ON (S2123: YES), the process proceeds to step S21212.

In step S21212, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening timer counter area T set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step S21212 that the opening period has ended (S21212: YES), the process proceeds to step S21213, and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S21214.

In step S21214, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step S21214, the process proceeds to step S21215.

In step S21215, the open / close processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21202 that the opening / closing processing period flag is ON (S21202: YES), the process proceeds to step S21216 to execute the opening / closing processing of the large winning opening. The opening and closing process of the big winning opening will be described later. After executing step S21216, the process proceeds to step S21217.

In step S21217, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed, and if it is determined that the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed (S21217: YES), the process proceeds to step S21218. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21217 that the opening / closing process of the large winning opening has not been completed (S21217: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

In step S21218, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step S21219.

In step S21219, the round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 of the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S21219, the process proceeds to step S21220.

In step S21220, the ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as the ending time) in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the ending timer counter as the ending time. After executing step S21220, the process proceeds to step S21221.

In step S21221, the ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step 40703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The voice emission control device 90 starts the effect corresponding to the ending period based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step S21221, the process proceeds to step S21222.

In step S21222, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21201 that the ending period flag is ON (S2121: YES), the process proceeds to step S21223.

In step S21223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21220), it is determined whether or not the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step S21223 that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is "0" (S21223: YES), the process proceeds to step S21224.

In step S21224, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S21225, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21225, the process proceeds to step S21226, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S21227, and the open / close execution mode end command is set. The open / close execution mode end command is a command for notifying the voice emission control device 90 that the open / close execution mode has ended. The open / close execution mode end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21223 that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is not "0" (S21223: NO), the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing of the winning opening>
Next, the opening / closing process of the large winning opening will be described. The winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 53: S21216) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process. In step S21301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 54b is open. If it is determined in step S2301 that the opening / closing door 54b is not open (S2301: NO), the process proceeds to step S21320.

In step S21302, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening / closing door 54b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process (FIG. 53: S21208) is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing door 54b. If it is determined in step S21302 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 54b is satisfied (S21302: YES), the process proceeds to step S21303.

In step S2303, the opening / closing door 54b is opened. Then, the process proceeds to step S21304.

In step S21304, the opening / closing door opening command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 54b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 48: S20703) of the normal processing. After executing step S21304, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed.

If it is determined in step S21302 that the opening / closing condition of the opening / closing door 54b is not satisfied (S21302: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S2301 that the opening / closing door 54b is being opened (S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S21305.

In step S21305, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening / closing door 54b is satisfied. The closing condition of the opening / closing door 54b is that the continuous opening time (30 seconds in this embodiment) of the opening / closing door 54b set in the opening / closing scenario has elapsed, or the number preset in the large winning opening 54a (this embodiment). In the form, it is established when it is detected that 9) game balls have entered. If it is determined in step S21305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 54b is satisfied (S21305: YES), the process proceeds to step S21306.

In step S21306, the opening / closing door 54b is closed. Then, the process proceeds to step S21307.

In step S21307, an open / close door closing command is set. The opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the opening / closing door 54b has been closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 48: S20303) of the normal processing. After executing step S21307, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed.

If it is determined in step S21305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 54b is not satisfied (S21305: NO), the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the migration process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 53: S21225) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S21401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is turned on in the RAM 64 as the jackpot flag.

If it is determined in step S21401 that the jackpot flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot set in the RAM 64 is ON (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21402 and the high probability mode flag is turned ON. After executing step S21402, the process proceeds to step S21403.

In step S21403, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. .. After executing step S21403, the process proceeds to step S21404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21401 that the jackpot flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot set in the RAM 64 is not ON (S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21404 as it is.

In step S21404, the high frequency support mode flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned ON. Specifically, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot flag, and when the determined jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot B and 8R probability variation jackpot B, the high frequency support mode B flag is turned ON, and the determined jackpot type is 8R. In the case of probability change jackpot A, the high frequency support mode A flag is turned ON. After executing step S21404, the process proceeds to step S21405.

In step S21405, a high-frequency support mode command is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, the high-frequency support mode A command or the high-frequency support mode B command is set. The set command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: step S20703) of the normal process.

In step S21406, a process of clearing (turning off) the jackpot flag is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S21407.

In step S21407, 100 is set in the game count counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game count counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. After that, the migration process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electrical support>
Next, the processing for electric service support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 48: S20708) of the normal process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process. In step S21501, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag of the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is normally turned on when the electric accessory 53 is opened and turned off when the electric accessory 53 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S21501 that the supporting flag is not ON (S21501: NO), the process proceeds to step S21520.

In step S21502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery as to whether or not the normal electric accessory 53 is set to the open state, and is turned off when the supporting flag is ON. It is a flag. If it is determined in step S21502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S2152: NO), the process proceeds to step S21503.

In step S21503, it is determined whether or not the value of the electric service timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the electric service timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. The count value set in the electric service timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S21503 that the value of the timer counter Td for electric service is not "0" (S21503: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the timer counter Td for electric service is "0" (S21503: YES), the process proceeds to step S21504.

In step S21504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the symbol in the normal diagram unit 38. If it is determined in step S21504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S21504: YES), the process proceeds to step S21505 to set the off display. By setting the off display, the variable display of the symbol in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21506, and the electric service processing in-execution flag is turned off. After executing step S21506, the process for supporting the main electric service is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21504 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation display (S21504: NO), the process proceeds to step S21507.

In step S21507, it is determined whether or not the electric service processing execution flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21507 that the electric service processing in-execution flag is not ON (S21507: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S21507 that the electric service processing execution flag is ON (S21507: YES), the process proceeds to step S21508.

In step S21508, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S21509 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the high-frequency support mode A flag or the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode (S21508: NO) in step S21508 and the high frequency support mode is set in step S21509 (S21509: YES), the process proceeds to step S21510 and the electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 moved to the execution area 64e for the electric accessory in the ball entry process for through (FIG. 47: S20604) is 0 to 461, the electric accessory is released. The lottery will be won (see FIG. 36 (b)). Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the electric accessory timer counter Td. As described with reference to FIG. 37, in the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B, since the fluctuation time in the electric service open lottery is 0.05 seconds, the timer counter Td for electric service is set to “25” (that is, 0. 05sec) is set. The electric service timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, the process proceeds to step S21511.

In step S21511, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S21510 is the support winning. If it is determined in step S21511 that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is the support winning (S2151: YES), the process proceeds to step S21512 and the support winning flag is turned ON. After executing step S21512, the process proceeds to step S21513.

In step S21513, the setting process of the electric service opening / closing scenario for the high frequency support mode according to the type of the high frequency support mode is executed. This process sets an opening / closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A or high frequency support mode B). Is. Specifically, when the high-frequency support mode A flag is ON, the high-frequency support mode A electric service opening / closing scenario is set. In the high-frequency support mode A electric combination opening / closing scenario, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode A, the normal electric accessory 53 is set to be opened once and the normal electric accessory 53 is opened. It is set to close the normal electric accessory 53 on the condition that 3 seconds have passed in the open state of the accessory 53 or one game ball enters the second starting port 34 (see FIG. 37). ). On the other hand, when the high frequency support mode B flag is ON, the electric service opening / closing scenario for the high frequency support mode B is set. In the high-frequency support mode B electric combination opening / closing scenario, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode B, the normal electric accessory 53 is set to be opened once and the normal electric accessory 53 is opened. It is set to close the normal electric accessory 53 on condition that 6 seconds have passed in the open state of the accessory 53 or one game ball enters the second starting port 34 (see FIG. 37). ). After executing step S21513, the process for supporting the electric service is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21508 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S21508: YES), or if it is determined in step S21509 that the mode is not in the high frequency support mode (S21509: NO), the process proceeds to step S21514.

In step S21514, an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 moved to the execution area 64e for the electric accessory in the through ball entry process (FIG. 47: S20604) is 0 or 1, the electric accessory is released. The lottery will be won (see FIG. 36 (a)). Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "5000" (that is, 10.0 sec) is set in the electric accessory timer counter Td. As described with reference to FIG. 37, in the low frequency support mode, since the fluctuation time in the electric service opening lottery is 10 seconds, "5000" (that is, 10.0 sec) is set in the electric service timer counter Td. The electric service timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, the process proceeds to step S21515.

In step S21515, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S21514 is the support winning. If it is determined in step S21515 that the support is not won (S21515: NO), the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21515 that the support is won (S21515: YES), the process proceeds to step S21516 and the support winning flag is turned ON. After executing step S21516, the process proceeds to step S21517.

In step S21517, the setting process of the electric service opening / closing scenario for the low frequency support mode is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening / closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 53 when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the low frequency support mode is set. In the low-frequency support mode electric role opening / closing scenario, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the low-frequency support mode, the normal electric accessory 53 is set to be opened once, and the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened. It is set to close the ordinary electric accessory 53 on condition that 3 seconds have passed in the open state of 53 or one game ball enters the second starting port 34 (see FIG. 37). After executing step S21517, the process for supporting the electric service is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21502 that the support winning flag is ON (S2152: YES), the process proceeds to step S21518, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter Td for electric service is "0". In this case, the electric service timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal drawing unit 38. If it is determined in step S21518 that the value of the timer counter Td for electric service is not "0" (S21518: NO), the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner in the normal drawing unit 38. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21518 that the value of the timer counter Td for electric service is "0" (S21518: YES), the process proceeds to step S21519.

In step S21519, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the pattern in the normal drawing unit 38 is terminated in the state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21520, the supporting flag is turned ON, and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric service support is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21501 that the supporting flag is ON (S21501: YES), the process proceeds to step S21521 to execute the electric function opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the normal electric accessory 53. The details of the electric service opening / closing process will be described later. After executing step S21521, the process proceeds to step S21522.

In step S21522, it is determined whether or not the electric service opening / closing process has been completed. If it is determined in step S21522 that the electric service opening / closing process has not been completed (S21522: NO), the electric service support process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S21522 that the electric service opening / closing process is completed (S21522: YES), the process proceeds to step S21523 and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S21524, and the electric service processing in-execution flag is turned off. After executing step S21524, the process for supporting the electric service is terminated.

<Electric service opening / closing process>
Next, the electric service opening / closing process will be described. The electric service opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 56: S21521) of the electric service support process.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the electric service opening / closing process. In step S21601, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open. If it is determined in step S21601 that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is not open (S21601: NO), the process proceeds to step S21602.

In step S21602, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the set opening / closing scenario is satisfied. Specifically, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened (once in the present embodiment) when one winning the electric service opening lottery is won is counted, and the closed state of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is maintained. By counting with the timer counter whether or not the timing for opening is reached after a lapse of time, it is determined whether or not the condition for shifting the normal electric accessory 53 to the open state is satisfied. If it is determined in step S21602 that the opening condition of the opening / closing scenario is not satisfied (S21602: NO), the electric service opening / closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21602 that the opening condition of the opening / closing scenario is satisfied (S21602: YES), the process proceeds to step S21603.

In step S21603, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened. After executing step S21603, the process proceeds to step S21604.

In step S21604, the electric service release command is set. The electric service release command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: step S20703) of the normal process. The voice emitting device that has received the electric service release command executes the setting for executing the effect for electric service release. After that, the electric service opening / closing process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21601 that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is not open (S21601: YES), the process proceeds to step S21605.

In step S21605, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is satisfied. Specifically, the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode A is "3 seconds have passed in the open state" or "one game ball is open while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open". Either one of "the ball has entered the second starting port 34" is established. The closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode B is "6 seconds have passed in the open state" or "one game ball is in the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open". Either one of "the ball has entered the ball" is established. The closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the low frequency support mode is "3 seconds have passed in the open state" or "one game ball is placed in the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open". Either one of "the ball has entered" is established. If it is determined in step S21605 that the closing condition is not satisfied (S21605: NO), the electric service opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21605 that the closing condition is satisfied (S21605: YES), the process proceeds to step S21606.

In step S21606, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed. After executing step S21606, the process proceeds to step S21607.

In step S21607, the electric service closing command is set. The electric service closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: step S20703) of the normal process. The voice emitting device that has received the electric service closing command executes the setting for executing the effect for closing the electric service. After that, the electric service opening / closing process is completed.

B5. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Some configurations of the power supply device 85 and the like are omitted.

The MPU 92 is mounted on the voice emission control board 91 provided in the voice emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element having a built-in ROM 93, RAM 94, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs, fixed value data, tables, and the like executed by the MPU 92. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 60 and an effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46, various lamps 47, and a display control device 100 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 102.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the voice emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound / light side RAM 94 are also referred to, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as a display side MPU 102.

B6. Various processes executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the voice emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the voice emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

In step S21701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S21701, the process proceeds to step S21702.

In step S21702, the state storage process is executed. The state storage process is a process of storing the state of the game being executed by using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The state of the game stored as a flag is used to determine the effect to be executed. The details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing step S21702, the process proceeds to step S21703.

In step S21703, the support mode effect processing is executed. The support mode effect processing is a process for setting a background moving image and an output sound separately from the effect for each game time according to the type of support mode. Details of the support mode production process will be described later. After executing step S21703, the process proceeds to step S21704.

In step S21704, the game rotation effect processing is executed. The game turn effect process is a process for setting an effect to be executed for each game turn. The details of the game time production process will be described later. After executing step S21704, the process proceeds to step S21705.

In step S21705, other display processing is executed. The other display processing is a processing for executing various settings related to the display based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, a process for updating the number of holds displayed in the hold display area Ds is performed. After executing step S21705, the process proceeds to step S21706.

In step S21706, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the processes from step S21703 to step S21705. That is, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps S21703 to S21705. After executing step S21706, the process proceeds to step S21707.

In step S21707, the audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the processes of steps S21703 to S21705. That is, the sound output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the sound corresponding to the effect set in step S21705 from step S21703 is output. After executing step S21707, the timer interrupt process ends.

<State memory processing>
Next, the state storage process will be described. The state storage process is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 59: S21702).

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the state storage process. The state storage process is a process for memorizing the state of the game being executed in the voice emission control device 90. The state storage process is roughly composed of three processes. Specifically, steps S21801 to S21804 are processes for storing whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. Step S21805 to step S21808 are processes for storing whether the lottery mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. Steps S21809 to S21818 are processes for storing whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode A, the high frequency support mode B, or the low frequency support mode.

In step S21801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode end command has been received. The open / close execution mode end command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 when the open / close execution mode ends. If it is determined in step S21801 that the open / close execution mode end command has been received (S21801: YES), the process proceeds to step S21802, and the open / close execution mode execution flag is turned off. The open / close execution mode executing flag is a flag for memorizing whether the open / close execution mode is being executed, is turned on when the execution of the open / close execution mode is started, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode ends. It is a flag to be set. After executing step S21802, the process proceeds to step S21803.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21801 that the open / close execution mode end command has not been received (S21801: NO), the process proceeds to step S21803 as it is.

In step S21803, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode start command has been received. The open / close execution mode start command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 when the open / close execution mode is started. If it is determined in step S21803 that the open / close execution mode start command has been received (S21803: YES), the process proceeds to step S21804, and the open / close execution mode execution flag is turned ON. After executing step S21804, the process proceeds to step S21805.

If it is determined in step S21803 that the open / close execution mode start command has not been received (S21803: NO), the process proceeds to step S21805 as it is.

In step S21805, it is determined whether or not a high probability mode command has been received. The high-probability mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 when the open / close execution mode ends and the high-probability mode starts. If it is determined in step S21805 that the high probability mode command has been received, the process proceeds to step S21806, and the sound light side high probability mode flag is turned ON. The sound light side high probability mode flag is a flag for memorizing whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. After executing step S21806, the process proceeds to step S21807.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21805 that the high probability mode command has not been received (S21805: NO), the process proceeds to step S21807 as it is.

In step S21807, it is determined whether or not the low probability mode command has been received. The low-probability mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 when the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. If it is determined in step S21807 that the low probability mode command has been received, the process proceeds to step S21808, and the sound light side high probability mode flag is turned off. After executing step S21808, the process proceeds to step S21809.

If it is determined in step S21807 that the low probability mode command has not been received (S21807: NO), the process proceeds to step S21809 as it is.

In step S21809, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode A command has been received. The high-frequency support mode A command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode A. If it is determined in step S21809 that the high frequency support mode A command has been received (S21809: YES), the process proceeds to step S21810.

In step S21810, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. The sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is a flag that is turned on when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode B, and is turned off when the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode B to another support mode. .. If it is determined in step S21810 that the sound / light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S21810: YES), the process proceeds to step S21811 to turn off the sound / light side high frequency support mode B flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S21812.

If it is determined in step S21810 that the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is not ON (S21810: NO), the process proceeds to step S21812 as it is.

In step S21812, the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is turned ON. The sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is a flag that is turned ON when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode A, and is turned OFF when the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode A to another support mode. .. After executing step S21812, the process proceeds to step S21813.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21809 that the high frequency support mode A command has not been received (S21809: NO), the process proceeds to step S21813 as it is.

In step S21813, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode B command has been received. The high-frequency support mode B command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode B. If it is determined in step S21813 that the high frequency support mode B command has been received (S21813: YES), the process proceeds to step S21814.

In step S21814, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21814 that the sound / light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (S21814: YES), the process proceeds to step S21815 to turn off the sound / light side high frequency support mode A flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S21816.

If it is determined in step S21814 that the sound / light side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (S21814: NO), the process proceeds to step S21816 as it is.

In step S21816, the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is turned ON. After executing step S21816, the process proceeds to step S21817.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21813 that the high frequency support mode B command has not been received (S21813: NO), the process proceeds to step S21817 as it is.

In step S21817, it is determined whether or not the low frequency support mode command has been received. The low-frequency support mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S21817 that the low frequency support mode command has been received (S21817: YES), the process proceeds to step S21818.

In step S21818, the ON flag of the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is turned off. After that, the state storage process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21817 that the low frequency support mode command has not been received (S21817: NO), the state storage process is terminated as it is.

<Processing for support mode production>
Next, the process for producing the support mode will be described. The support mode effect processing is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the voice light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 59: S21703).

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the support mode effect processing. In step S21901, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode execution flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21901 that the open / close execution mode execution flag is not ON (S21901: NO), the process proceeds to step S21902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21901 that the open / close execution mode execution flag is ON (S21901: YES), the support mode effect processing is terminated.

In step S21902, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21902 that neither the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag nor the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S21902: NO), the process proceeds to step S21903.

In step S21903, the effect pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode, the video and audio prompting the player to hit the ball to the distribution mechanism 120 by hitting the left is separately provided for each game (game turn). , This is a process for setting the content to be output as the background image and the background music as an effect pattern in order to output as the background image and the background music. After executing step S21903, the support mode effect processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21902 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S21902: YES), the process proceeds to step S21904.

In step S21904, it is determined whether or not the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21904 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (S21904: YES), the process proceeds to step S21905.

In step S21905, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A is executed. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode A, a video or audio that prompts the player to hit the ball to the left and put the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 is produced for each game time (game time production). ), In order to output as a background image and background music, it is a process for setting the content to be output as the background image and background music as an effect pattern. In the high frequency support mode A state, the rate at which the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode state, and a more advantageous privilege can be given when a big hit is won. Because of the nature of the effect, the effect for the high frequency support mode A is an effect that gives the player a feeling of expectation even more than the effect for the low frequency support mode. After executing step S21905, the support mode effect processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21904 that the sound / light side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (S21904: NO), the process proceeds to step S21906.

In step S21906, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B is executed. Specifically, in the state of the high frequency support mode B, the video and audio prompting the player to hit the right side and let the through gate 35b pass the game ball are referred to as a production for each game time (game time production). Separately, in order to output as a background image and background music, it is a process for setting the content to be output as the background image and background music as an effect pattern. In the high-frequency support mode B state, the rate at which the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the high-frequency support mode A state, and a more advantageous privilege is given when the jackpot is won. Since there is a possibility, the effect for the high-frequency support mode B is an effect that gives the player a feeling of expectation even more than the effect for the high-frequency support mode A. After executing step S21906, the support mode effect processing is terminated.

<Processing for game performance>
Next, the processing for producing the game times will be described. The game rotation effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 59: S21704).

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the game rotation effect processing. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not a variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2001 that the command for variation has been received (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and information on the presence / absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, the process proceeds to step S2203.

In step S2203, the effect pattern setting process is executed. The process is a process of setting an effect pattern in the game times to be processed. The details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204.

In step S2204, the liquid crystal display symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal display symbol setting process, when the result of the winning lottery of this game round is a big hit, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on the effective line L1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display this time. Set as the information of the symbol. In addition, if the result of the winning lottery for this game is out of order, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred from the content of the variable command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L1, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is established on the effective line L1. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L1 and the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the effective line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the design for the liquid crystal display this time. After executing step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205.

In step S2205, the game rotation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The game rotation effect command is information including the content of the effect pattern set in step S2203 and the liquid crystal display to be stopped set in step S22004. The display control device 100 that has received the game turn effect command causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display an image for effect or an image of a liquid crystal symbol based on the information included in the game turn effect command. After executing step S2205, the process proceeds to step S22006.

In step S22006, the pending information update process is executed. In the hold information update process, the information in the hold number counter area is updated so that the hold number stored in the hold number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After executing step S22008, the game rotation effect processing is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 62: S2203) of the game rotation effect process.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the effect pattern. In step S22101, it is determined whether or not the game times for which the effect is set is a big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, the determination is made based on the information regarding the presence or absence of a jackpot included in the received variation command. If it is determined in step S22101 that the game times to be processed have won a big hit in the winning lottery (S22101: YES), the process proceeds to step S22102.

In step S22102, it is determined whether or not the game times for which the effect is set has won the probabilistic jackpot in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S22102 that the probability variation jackpot has been won (S22102: YES), the process proceeds to step S22103.

In step S22103, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the game times in which the jackpot that is the processing target is won is jackpot B. In step S22103, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game times won in the jackpot that is the processing target is jackpot B (S22103: YES), the process proceeds to step S22104.

In step S22104, the effect pattern setting process for the probability variation jackpot B is executed. If the probability change jackpot B is won, the game times to be executed from the next time will be the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. Therefore, since the probability variation jackpot B is a jackpot that is in a very advantageous state for the player, the effect pattern for the probability variation jackpot B is set to give the player a great sense of expectation. After executing step S22104, the effect pattern setting process ends.

In step S22103, if it is determined that there is no jackpot B in the jackpot type of the game times in which the jackpot that is the processing target is won (S22103: NO), the process proceeds to step S22105.

In step S22105, the effect pattern setting process for the probability variation jackpot A is executed. After executing step S22105, the effect pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S22102 that the probability variation jackpot has not been won (S22102: NO), the process proceeds to step S22106. In step S22106, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the game times in which the jackpot that is the processing target is won is the jackpot B. In step S22106, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game times won in the jackpot that is the processing target is jackpot B (S22106: YES), the process proceeds to step S22107.

In step S22107, the effect pattern setting process for the normal jackpot B is executed. After executing step S22107, the effect pattern setting process ends.

In step S22106, if it is determined that the jackpot type of the game times won in the jackpot that is the processing target is not jackpot B (S22106: NO), the process proceeds to step S22108.

In step S22108, the effect pattern setting process for the normal jackpot A is executed. After executing step S22108, the effect pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S22101 that the game times to be processed have not won the big hit in the winning lottery (S22101: NO), the process proceeds to step S22109.

In step S22109, the effect pattern setting process for disengagement is executed. After executing step S22109, the effect pattern setting process ends.

<Main processing>
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

In step S2221, the initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the character information in the compressed format stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also, make other settings necessary for initialization. Then, the process proceeds to step S22220.

In step S22220, the interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt enable setting is executed, infinite loop processing is executed in the main processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S22301, the command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed by detecting the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105. In the V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is given every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Therefore, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed, so that the drawing of a new image can be started or displayed during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the processing details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

In step S22401, the command correspondence process is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 65), and the processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of drawing and displaying an image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (S22401), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so that there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the voice emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the liquid crystal display symbol set by the voice emission control device 90 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be quickly grasped. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41.

In step S22402, the display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command correspondence process (S22401) or the like. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S22403.

In step S22403, task processing is executed. In the task process, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (S22402). In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined for each character (sprite). Then, the process proceeds to step S22404.

In step S22404, the drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S22403), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on this information, and together with a drive signal, displays an image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt process on the symbol display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step S22405, other processing is executed, and then the V interrupt processing is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, although the game ball entered from the opening 122 is distributed to the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2 by the distribution mechanism 120, When the distributed game ball enters the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b, the same symbol (first symbol) is changed, so that the balls are distributed. It is possible to give unexpectedness to the player who presumed that a different symbol fluctuates depending on the ball entry portion (starting port) at the tip. In addition, it is possible to make the player make various guesses about the role (installation purpose) of the distribution mechanism 120 that guides the ball entry portion (starting port) that fluctuates the same symbol despite the distribution to the two routes. can.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment includes the ordinary electric accessory 53 on the path through which the game ball flows from the right side flow path R2 to the first starting port 33b, the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path are provided by the distribution mechanism 120. Regardless of which of R2 is distributed, the game ball distributed to any of them may be an opportunity to change the same symbol (first symbol), or the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 is an ordinary electric accessory. Depending on the 53, the second symbol may be changed, and even in the same distribution mode in which the game ball reaches the distribution mechanism 120, the first symbol and the second symbol are changed depending on the type of support mode. The proportions to be allowed can be different. That is, by controlling the winning probability of the electric service opening lottery that determines whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened, the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol can be set to different modes. ..

More specifically, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be considered as a distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 to the first starting port 33b and the second starting port 34, and the pachinko machine in the present embodiment can be considered. It can be considered that the machine 10 includes two distribution mechanisms, a distribution mechanism 120 and an ordinary electric accessory 53. Since the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 53 that functions as the distribution mechanism operates is the winning probability of the electric combination open lottery, it can be changed by changing the support mode. Therefore, even when the distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes the game ball that has reached the distribution mechanism 120 to the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2, the ordinary electric accessory 53 that functions as the distribution mechanism 53. By changing the probability that the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 is distributed to the second starting port 34 (that is, the winning probability of the electric service opening lottery), the first symbol and the second symbol fluctuate. The ratio can be changed. For example, when the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 53 distributes the game ball to the second starting port 34 (the probability of winning the electric combination open lottery) is set low (in the case of the low frequency support mode), the distribution mechanism 120 sets the left side. The game ball distributed to the flow path R1 is made to enter the first starting port 33a, and the first symbol is changed. Then, since the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 has a low probability of winning the electric service opening lottery, it is possible to enter the ball into the first starting port 33b with a high probability and change the first symbol. That is, the game ball that has reached the distribution mechanism 120 is made to enter the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) with a high probability, and the first symbol is changed with a high probability (frequency). Can be made to.

On the other hand, when the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 53 distributes the game ball to the second starting port 34 (the probability of winning the electric combination open lottery) is set high (in the case of the high frequency support mode A), the distribution mechanism 120 is used. The game ball distributed to the left flow path R1 is inserted into the first starting port 33a, and the first symbol is changed. Then, since the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 has a high probability of winning the electric service opening lottery, it is possible to enter the ball into the second starting port 34 with a high probability and change the second symbol. In this way, by changing the winning probability of the electric service open lottery, it is possible to change the fluctuating ratio between the first symbol and the second symbol even if the distribution mode of the game balls is the same.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a through gate 35b as a through gate that triggers the execution of the electric service opening lottery, in addition to the through gate 35a arranged inside the distribution mechanism 120, the distribution mechanism The ordinary electric accessory 53 can be opened even in the distribution mode of the game ball that does not go through the 120. As a result, in the state of the high frequency support mode B, by distributing the game ball in the distribution mode passing through the through gate 35b, the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 34 with high probability.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can realize the following. When the game ball is distributed so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120 in the low frequency support mode, the game ball enters the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b, and the second starting port 33a. Since it is unlikely that a game ball will enter 34, only the first symbol can be changed with a high probability. When the game ball is distributed so that the player reaches the distribution mechanism 120 in the high frequency support mode A, there is a high possibility that the game ball enters the first start port 33a and the second start port 34. Therefore, the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed. When the game ball is distributed so that the player passes through the through gate 35b in the high frequency support mode B, there is a high possibility that the game ball enters only the second starting port 34, so that there is a high probability that the game ball will enter the second starting port 34. Only 2 symbols can be changed. As a result, there are at least three game states in which only the first symbol fluctuates with a high probability, the first symbol and the second symbol fluctuate, and only the second symbol fluctuates with a high probability. You can create a state.

In other words, when the game ball is distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the game ball to the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) per unit time. The relative ratio between the number of balls entered and the number of game balls entered into the second starting port 34 can be controlled to be changeable in at least three stages. Therefore, by combining the three stages of the relative ratio of entering the ball (game state), it is possible to create a new flow of various games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the above-mentioned game flow has also been described, here, the effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described by comparison with the conventional pachinko machine. First, when a winning lottery (including a big hit winning and a small winning winning if a small winning winning is set) is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting port. The expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) given to the player is set as the first privilege expected value, and the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting port is won (big hit winning, big hit winning, In addition, the expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) given when the small hit winning is set (including the small winning winning) is set as the second privilege expected value. In addition, the expected value of the privilege given when winning in the normal time is set as the expected value of the privilege in the normal time, and the expected value of the privilege given when winning in the high frequency support mode is the expected value of the privilege in the case of high support. And.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a “conventional pachinko machine”) provided with a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to a first start port and a second start port. In the conventional pachinko machine, in the initial normal state (for example, low probability mode and low frequency support mode) when the game is started, the game balls are distributed so as to reach the distribution mechanism to reach the first start port and the second start. The game balls are alternately inserted into the mouth. Then, when the mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory) operates frequently, so that the game ball is inserted into the second starting port with a high probability without going through the sorting means. Let me.

In the conventional pachinko machine, if the expected value of the privilege at the time of high support is higher than the expected value of the privilege at the time of normal and the difference is to be increased, it is inevitably the second to increase the expected value of the privilege at the time of high support. It is necessary to increase the expected value of the privilege, but if the expected value of the second privilege is increased, the expected value of the privilege at normal times also increases (in the normal state, a game ball enters the first start port and the second start port). Because the ball is hit and the lottery is executed). Further, even if the first privilege expected value is reduced, the normal privilege expected value is the average of the first privilege expected value and the second privilege expected value, so the effect of reducing the first privilege expected value is It gets smaller.

Furthermore, if there is a regulation on the size of benefits that can be granted per unit time, if the expected value of benefits at normal times is relatively large, the expected value of benefits at high support will be adjusted in order to adjust within the range of the regulation. Needs to be small. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the expected value of the privilege at the normal time and the expected value of the privilege at the time of high support. In other words, among the game states excluding the open / close execution mode, it is not possible to provide a large swing in the profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. As a result, the player's expectation when shifting from the normal state (normal game state, state with the lowest expected value of privilege) to the high frequency support mode (best game state, state with the highest expected value of privilege) is increased. Cannot be evoked.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment distributes the game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, but the game balls enter only the first starting port 33a with a high probability. By setting the first privilege expected value low, the normal privilege expected value can be lowered. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, when the player hits the right side, the game ball enters only the second starting port 34 with a high probability, so that the expected value of the second privilege should be set high. Therefore, the expected value of the privilege at the time of high support in the high frequency support B can be increased. That is, among the game states excluding the open / close execution mode, it is possible to provide a large swing range in the profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the game balls are alternately entered into the first start port 33a and the second start port 34. The expected value of benefits during high support (at high frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between the expected value of benefits during normal times and the expected value of benefits during high support (at high frequency support mode B), and is in the normal state → high frequency support. When the game progresses in the flow of the game such as mode A → high frequency support mode B, the value of the expected privilege value to be given is gradually increasing, and among the game states excluding the open / close execution mode, it is normal. There can be a large swing in the profits that the player can obtain between the gaming state and the best gaming state.

Furthermore, if there is a regulation on the size of the benefits that can be granted per unit time, by setting the expected value of the first benefit low, the size of the benefits that can be granted per unit time as a whole can be increased. It is possible to adjust, and it is possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first privilege expected value and the second privilege expected value is large. That is, among the game states excluding the open / close execution mode, the difference in profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state can be given per unit time while ensuring a large swing range. It becomes easy to adjust the size of various benefits within the limits of regulation.

The features of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects of the features are compared with a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) provided with a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to the first starting port and the second starting port. As described above, the effect is not only effective for the conventional pachinko machines illustrated above, but also for pachinko machines having two or more ball-entry portions that trigger different types of lottery. The effect is achieved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the through gate 35a, which triggers the passage of the game ball to execute the electric service opening lottery, is arranged in one path (right flow path R2) distributed by the distribution mechanism 120. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the mode in which the distribution mechanism 120 distributes the game balls (the order in which the game balls are distributed to the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2), and a sense of expectation can be given. Further, when the parts are distributed to the right side flow path R2, it is possible to give an expectation as to whether or not to win the electric service opening lottery. Therefore, at least two levels of expectation are given to the mode of distribution of the game balls in the distribution mechanism 120 and the lottery result in the electric service opening lottery (that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 53 is released). Can be done.

The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a low frequency support mode as a support mode, and the winning probability of the electric service open lottery is higher than that of the low frequency support mode, but the fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) and the normal in the electric service open lottery. The high-frequency support mode A, in which the opening time of the electric accessory 53 is the same as the low-frequency support mode, has a higher probability of winning the electric role opening lottery than the low-frequency support mode, and the variable time in the electric role opening lottery (normal symbol). It is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode B, which has a short fluctuation time) and a long opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53, and as explained in the above game flow by utilizing the switching of these three support modes. In addition, various new game flows can be created.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the following effects.
First, it is defined as follows.
-The lottery time (variable time of the normal symbol) of the electric service open lottery in the high frequency support mode A is Tp, and when the electric service open lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 53 plays the game ball from the time when the fluctuation time ends. Normal when the time until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball becomes able to circulate on the upper surface is Tm, and one electric service opening lottery is won. The opening time of the electric accessory 53 is Ts1, the time from the time when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a to the time when the game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is Tr1, and the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and the normal electric accessory 53. Let Tf1 be the time from the time when the ball reaches the second starting port 34 until the ball enters the second starting port 34 by the ordinary electric accessory 53 opened.
-The lottery time (normal symbol fluctuation time) of the electric service open lottery in the high frequency support mode B is Tp, and when the electric service open lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 53 plays the game ball from the time when the fluctuation time ends. Normal when the time until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball becomes able to circulate on the upper surface is Tm, and one electric service opening lottery is won. The opening time of the electric accessory 53 is Ts2, the time from the time when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b to the time when the game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is Tr2, and the game ball passes through the through gate 35b and the ordinary electric accessory 53. Let Tf2 be the time from the time when the ball reaches the second starting port 34 until the ball enters the second starting port 34 by the ordinary electric accessory 53 opened.
When defined in this way, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured to satisfy the following equations (1) to (3).
Tp + Tm ≤ Tr1 ... Equation (1)
Tp + Tm ≤ Tr2 ... Equation (2)
Tr1 + Tf1 ≤ Tp + Tm + Ts1 <Tr2 + Tf2 ≤ Tp + Tm + Ts2 ... Equation (3)
In the present embodiment, the specific values of the above parameters are Tp = 0.05 seconds, Tm = 0.1 seconds, Tr1 = 0.3 seconds, Tr2 = 0.3 seconds, Tf1 = 2. 0.0 seconds, Tf2 = 5.0 seconds, Ts1 = 3.0 seconds, Ts2 = 6.0 seconds, satisfying the above equations (1) to (3).

In such a configuration, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode A, when the game ball is distributed (left-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35a, it is guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (normally, when the game ball is circulated (left-handed). The game ball can be entered into the second starting port 34 by the auxiliary), but when the game ball is distributed (right-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35b, the game ball is placed in the second starting port 34. Since the electric accessory 53 is normally closed before entering the ball, the game ball cannot be entered into the second starting port 34.
Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of the game ball which is advantageous for the player, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode A, the game is to pass through the through gate 35a (to reach the distribution mechanism 120). The distribution mode in which the balls are distributed (left-handed) is more advantageous for the player than the distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35b (right-handed).

On the other hand, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode B, when the through gate 35a is circulated so as to pass through the game ball, and when the through gate 35b is circulated so as to pass through the game ball. In either case, the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 34 by guidance (auxiliary) by the ordinary electric accessory 53. However, when the through gate 35a is distributed so that the game balls pass through, the game balls pass through the distribution mechanism 120. Therefore, among the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120, the games distributed to the right flow path R2. Only a sphere can pass through the through gate 35a. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed (left-handed) so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, the balls pass through the through gate 35a for the number of game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 and enter the second starting port 34. The ratio of the number of game balls to be played is the second through the through gate 35b with respect to the number of game balls that have reached the through gate 35b when the game balls are distributed (right-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35b. It is lower than the ratio of the number of game balls entering the starting port 34. Therefore, when considering a distribution mode of game balls that is advantageous for the player, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode B, the distribution mode (right-handed) in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35b. This is a more advantageous distribution mode for the player than the distribution mode (left-handed) in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35a (to reach the distribution mechanism 120).

Here, the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B differ only in the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 when one winning of the electric combination opening lottery is performed as the control during the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is an advantageous game for the player only by switching between two high-frequency support modes in which the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is different when one winning the electric role opening lottery is won. The distribution mode of the ball can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property, and further, it is possible to make the player actively participate in the operation of changing the distribution mode of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

B7. Modification example of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as that of the above embodiment will be omitted.

B7-1. Modification 1:
In the second embodiment, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is arranged in the high frequency support mode B. While guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down into the first starting port 33b. There is a problem such as throwing a ball. Modification 1 shown below solves the above-mentioned problems.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in the first modification. FIG. 67 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the first modification. In FIG. 67, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an open state when represented by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the second starting port 34 in this example is arranged on the right side of the first starting port 33b when viewed from the front of the game board 30. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes two movable pieces, a left movable piece 53d and a right movable piece 53e. The left movable piece 53d is arranged on the distribution path of the game ball from the opening 124 to the first starting port 33b. The left movable piece 53d is inclined so that the right portion is located below the left portion. The right movable piece 53e is arranged on the distribution path of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b. The right movable piece 53e is inclined so that the left side portion is located below the right side portion.

The contents of control such as the winning probability of the electric service opening lottery in each support mode, the fluctuation time in the electric service opening lottery, and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 are the same as those in the above embodiment. Each support mode when such a configuration is adopted will be described below.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the ball to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. During the execution of the low frequency support mode, as in the above embodiment, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2, and the left side flow. The game ball distributed to the road R1 enters the first starting port 33a (FIG. 67 (a)), and the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 enters the first starting port 33b (FIG. 67). (B)).

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode A in the first modification. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the ball to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. During the execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2, as in the above embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68A, the game ball swung to the left side flow path R1 enters the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 is guided (assisted) to the left movable piece 53d of the open ordinary electric accessory 53 with a high probability to be the second starting port. Enter the ball at 34. In this modification, even if the player strikes right while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the open normal electric accessory 53 to guide (assist) the second starting port 34. Since the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode B in the first modification. In the high frequency support mode B in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to hit the right side and pass through the through gate 35b. During the execution of the high-frequency support mode B, as in the above embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is highly likely to be guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the open ordinary electric accessory 53. Then, the ball enters the second starting port 34.

At this time, unlike the second embodiment, the portion (right movable piece 53e) of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B is the first starting port 33b. Since it is not arranged above the first start port 33b, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B does not pass through the upper part of the first start port 33b and is not passed through the upper part of the first start port 33b. It can reach up to 34. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting port 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B, a modified example In No. 1, the ratio of the game balls entering the second starting port 34 can be further increased as compared with the above embodiment.

B7-2. Modification 2:
In the second embodiment, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is arranged in the high frequency support mode A. While guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down to the first starting port. There is a problem that the ball enters 33b.

Similarly, in the high frequency support mode B, while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, causing the game ball to close. There is a problem that the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down enters the first starting port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above-mentioned problems.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory view showing a distribution mechanism 120, a normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port in the second modification. Further, FIG. 70 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the second modification.

The difference between the present modification 2 and the modification 1 is that the modification 2 does not include the first starting port 33b provided by the modification 1. Other configurations are the same as those of the first modification.

70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in the modified example 2, FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in the modified example 2, and FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in the modified example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the frequency support mode B.

In the case of the second modification, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the high frequency support mode A, the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 by the distribution mechanism 120 is guided by the left movable piece 53d to start the second start. Enter the mouth 34. At this time, unlike the configuration of the modified example 1, the modified example 2 does not have the first starting port 33b, so that the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing while guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34. Even when the game ball is discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting port 33b. In this modification, even if the player strikes right while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the open normal electric accessory 53 to guide (assist) the second starting port 34. Since the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

Further, unlike the second embodiment, since the first starting port 33b is not provided, the portion of the ordinary electric accessory 53 (movable on the right side) that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B. The game ball in which the piece 53e) is not located above the first starting port 33b and is guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B is the game ball of the first starting port 33b. It is possible to reach the second starting port 34 without passing through the upper part. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting port 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B, a modified example In No. 2, the ratio of the game balls entering the second starting port 34 can be further increased as compared with the second embodiment.

B7-3. Modification 3:
In the second embodiment, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is arranged in the high frequency support mode A. While guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down to the first starting port. There is a problem that the ball enters 33b.

Similarly, in the high frequency support mode B, while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, causing the game ball to close. There is a problem that the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down enters the first starting port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above-mentioned problems.

Further, in the first modification and the second modification, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes two parts, the left movable piece 53d and the right movable piece 53e, the ordinary electric combination 53 is provided with respect to the game area PA of the game board 30. There is a problem that a large space for arranging the object 53 must be secured. Modification 3 shown below solves the above-mentioned problems.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in the modified example 3. Further, FIG. 73 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the modified example 3.

As shown in FIG. 73, the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 3 does not have the first starting port 33b like the modified example 2. Further, the second starting port 34 is arranged on the distribution path through which the game ball released from the opening 124 flows down. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is arranged on the distribution path of the game ball from the opening 124 to the second starting port 34. The operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in this modification is different from that of the above embodiment. The opening and closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the third modification is executed by moving the movable piece 53a, which is arranged so as to project from the game board 30, on the plane of the game board 30. FIG. 73 shows the state of the low frequency support mode, and the ordinary electric accessory 53 shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b) is in the closed state.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the ball to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b), during the execution of the low frequency support mode, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are the left flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2. The game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 enter the first starting port 33a, and the game balls distributed to the right side flow path R2 flow out from the opening 124 and then close. It flows down the upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the state, and further flows down below the ordinary electric accessory 53 without entering the second starting port 34.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode A in the modified example 3. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the ball to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. While the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2. FIG. 74A shows how the game ball swung in the left flow path R1 enters the first starting port 33a. FIG. 74 (b) shows how the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 enters the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), the ordinary electric accessory 53 in this example shifts from the closed state to the open state by moving in the upper right direction when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. When the ordinary electric accessory 53 moves in the upper right direction, the game ball can be distributed from the opening 124 to the second starting port 34, and the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Since the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the above-described embodiment and the modified example guides the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 53 to the second starting port 34, the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Although it functions as an auxiliary means for assisting the ball, the ordinary electric accessory 53 in this example also facilitates that the game ball released from the opening 124 enters the second starting port 34 by shifting to the open state. Therefore, it functions as an auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34.

Further, in this modification, even if the player strikes right while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second starting port 34 Since the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode B in the modified example 3. In the high frequency support mode B in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to hit the right side and pass through the through gate 35b. As shown in the figure, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the upper surface of the wall portion W included in the game board 30, circulates on the upper surface of the wall portion W, and then is the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that is open. Is circulated and the ball enters the second starting port 34.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 3 does not have the first starting port 33b as in the modified example 2, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened at an unintended timing in the high frequency support mode A state. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting port 33b even in the case of shifting to the closed state.

Further, since the first starting port 33b is not provided, the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B may be located above the first starting port 33b. Instead, the game ball guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode B can reach the second starting port 34 without passing through the upper part of the first starting port 33b. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting port 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B, a modified example In No. 3, the ratio of the game balls entering the second starting port 34 can be further increased as compared with the second embodiment.

Further, unlike the above-mentioned modification 1 and modification 2, the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the modification 3 does not have two parts such as the left movable piece 53d and the right movable piece 53e, and is composed of one movable piece. .. Therefore, the space for arranging the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be narrowed (smaller) with respect to the game area PA of the game board 30, and the space for arranging the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be saved.

Further, when the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the modified example 3 is in the closed state, the distribution path from the right flow path R2 to the second starting port 34 is shielded, and the distribution from the wall portion W to the second starting port 34 is performed. Divide the route. Then, in the open state, the shield of the distribution path from the right side flow path R2 to the second starting port 34 is released, and the distribution path from the wall portion W to the second starting port 34 is formed. Therefore, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can change the two distribution channels by shifting from the closed state to the open state. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can change the states of two types of distribution channels at the same time by changing one state. As a result, whether the game ball is circulated in the distribution path from the right flow path R2 to the second starting port 34 or the game ball is circulated in the distribution path from the wall portion W to the second starting port 34. In this case as well, the game using the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be executed.

B7-4. Modification 4:
In the second embodiment, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is arranged in the high frequency support mode A. While guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the game ball is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down to the first starting port. There is a problem that the ball enters 33b.

Similarly, in the high frequency support mode B, while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes at an unintended timing, causing the game ball to close. There is a problem that the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down enters the first starting port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above-mentioned problems.

Further, in the configurations of the modification 2 and the modification 3, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 in the low frequency support mode and released from the opening 124 enter the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. It was configured to flow down as it was without a ball. As a result, there is a problem that the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out to the total number of prize balls to be paid out in a series of games is low regardless of the movement of the accessory. Modification 4 shown below solves the above-mentioned problems.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in the modified example 4. Further, FIG. 76 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the second modification.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 4, the general winning opening 32 is arranged on the distribution path through which the game ball discharged from the opening 124 flows down. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 4 does not include the first starting port 33b.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the low frequency support mode, the game ball entered from the opening 122 and distributed to the left flow path R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enters the first starting port 33a. Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 enter the general winning opening 32. In the configurations of the second modification and the third modification, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124 in the low frequency support mode are put into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. However, in this modified example, the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124 enters the general winning opening 32 in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, as compared with the above-mentioned modification 2 and modification 3, the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out to the total number of prize balls to be paid out in a series of games can be increased regardless of the movement of the accessory.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode A in the modified example 4. As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting port 33a. Then, the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 enters the second starting port 34. In the configuration of the modified example 4, even if the normal electric accessory 53 is closed while the left movable piece 53d is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball becomes the general winning opening 32. It is possible to avoid entering the ball and unintentionally entering the first starting port 33b. In this modification, even if the player strikes right while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the open normal electric accessory 53 to guide (assist) the second starting port 34. Since the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode B in the modified example 4. As shown in FIG. 78, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b has a high probability of being movable to the right side of the open ordinary electric accessory 53, as in the modification 1. Guided (assisted) by the piece 53e, the ball enters the second starting port 34. In the configuration of the modified example 4, unlike the second embodiment, the first starting port 33b is not provided, so that the ordinary electric accessory that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B. The game ball in which the portion 53 (right movable piece 53e) is not located above the first starting port 33b and is guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B is It is possible to reach the second starting port 34 without passing through the upper part of the first starting port 33b. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting port 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B, a modified example In No. 2, the ratio of the game balls entering the second starting port 34 can be further increased as compared with the second embodiment.

B7-5. Modification 5:
In the second embodiment, since the first starting port 33 includes the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b, the detection of the entry of the game ball with respect to the first starting port 33 is performed. It is necessary to perform at the two entry portions of the 1 start opening 33a and the 1st start opening 33b, and there is a problem that more sensors for detecting the entry of the game ball must be provided than before, and the game area PA of the game board 30. On the other hand, there is a problem that the space for arranging the starting port must be secured wider (larger) than before. Further, in the second embodiment, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B is arranged above the first starting port 33b. The game ball guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode B passes above the first starting port 33b and reaches the second starting port 34. At this time, if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down is generated. There is a problem that the ball unintentionally enters the first starting port 33b. The modification 5 shown below solves the above-mentioned problems.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in the modified example 5. Further, FIG. 79 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the modified example 5.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the distribution mechanism 120 in the modified example 5, the left side flow path R1 forms a semicircular shape. Further, the game ball distributed to the left flow path R1 and released from the opening 123, the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124, and any of the game balls can enter the first position. The starting port 33a is arranged. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 5 does not include the first starting port 33b.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the ball to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), during the execution of the low frequency support mode, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are the left flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2. The game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 enter the first starting port 33a, and the game balls distributed to the right side flow path R2 also flow out from the opening 124 and then become the first ball. 1 Enter the starting port 33a.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode A in the modified example 5. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the ball to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. While the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the game ball swung to the left flow path R1 enters the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 is guided (assisted) to the left movable piece 53d of the open ordinary electric accessory 53 with a high probability to be the second starting port. Enter the ball at 34. In this modification, even if the player strikes right while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the open normal electric accessory 53 to guide (assist) the second starting port 34. Since the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode B in the modified example 5. In the high frequency support mode B in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to hit the right side and pass through the through gate 35b. While the high-frequency support mode B is being executed, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is likely to be guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the open ordinary electric accessory 53 to the second starting port 34. Enter the ball.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example 5 is provided with only one of the first starting ports 33a as the first starting port, a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball, which must be provided as compared with the second embodiment. The number of can be reduced. In addition, the processing required for ball entry detection can be reduced accordingly. Further, the space that must be secured for arranging the starting port with respect to the game area PA of the game board 30 can be made narrower (smaller) than that of the second embodiment.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example, the portion (right movable piece 53e) of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B is the first starting port 33. Since it is not arranged above the (first starting port 33a), the gaming ball guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B is placed on the upper part of the first starting port 33. It is possible to reach the second starting port 34 without passing through. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting port 33. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B, a modified example In No. 5, the ratio of the game balls entering the second starting port 34 can be further increased as compared with the above embodiment.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification, although the game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, the game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 and the game balls distributed to the right side flow path R2 are Since the ball enters the first starting port 33a, which is the same entry portion, the player can make various guesses about the purpose of installing the distribution mechanism 120 and can give unexpectedness.

B7-6. Modification 6:
Since the distribution mechanism 120 in the second embodiment and the modified example alternately distributes the reached game ball to the left side flow path R1 and the right side flow path R2, the player can see the game ball that has reached the distribution mechanism 120. It is possible to guess how it will be distributed, and there is a problem that the player's ability to concentrate on the game and the degree of attention may decrease. The modification 6 shown below solves the above-mentioned problems.

FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in the modified example 6. Further, FIG. 82 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the modified example 6. In FIG. 82, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an open state when represented by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 82, the distribution mechanism 120 in the modified example 6 includes a crune 129 that temporarily retains the game ball that has entered through the opening 122. An opening 123 and an opening 124 are formed in the crune 129. Further, a through gate 35a is provided in the opening 124.

The game ball entering through the opening 122 temporarily stays while moving in the region of the crune 129, and then is discharged from the opening 123 or the opening 124. That is, the distribution mechanism 120 in this modified example randomly distributes the reached game ball to the opening 123 and the opening 124.

In the low-frequency support mode in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the ball to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the game ball distributed to the opening 123 in the crune 129 enters the first starting port 33a. Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the game ball distributed to the opening 124 in the crune 129 passes through the through gate 35a. The electric service opening lottery is executed with the passage as an opportunity, but since it is in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lottery is low, and the game balls distributed to the opening 124 have a high probability of reaching the first starting port 33b. Enter the ball.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode A in the modified example 6. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the profit of the player is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the ball to the left and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the game ball distributed to the opening 123 in the crune 129 enters the first starting port 33a. Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the game balls distributed to the opening 124 in the crune 129 pass through the through gate 35a, and the electric service opening lottery is executed with the passage as a trigger. Since it is the high frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the lottery is high, and in that case, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the open state. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the opening 124 by the crune 129 is guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 and enters the second starting port 34 with a high probability. In this modification, even if the player strikes right while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the open normal electric accessory 53 to guide (assist) the second starting port 34. Since the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34.

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode B in the modified example 6. As shown in FIG. 84, in the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is highly likely to be guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the open ordinary electric accessory 53. Then, the ball enters the second starting port 34.

As described above, the modified example 6 includes the crune 129, unlike the above-described embodiment and the modified example in that the distribution mechanism 120 is configured. That is, the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 are not distributed alternately to the two paths, but are randomly distributed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to guess how the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the distribution mode in the distribution mechanism 120, and the player can be concentrated on the game. In particular, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball distributed to the opening 123 enters the first starting port 33a, and the game ball distributed to the opening 124 has a high probability of entering the second starting port 34. Enter the ball. Therefore, unlike the case where the distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes to the two paths, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33a and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 Bias may occur. Therefore, in the case of the configuration of the modification 6, the high-frequency support A can give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, in this modification, a configuration in which two openings, an opening 123 and an opening 124, are formed in the crune 129 is adopted, but a configuration in which three or more openings are formed in the crune 129 is adopted. It may be adopted. For example, the Kroon 129 may employ a configuration in which a third opening is provided in addition to the opening 123 and the opening 124. Then, a configuration in which the general winning opening 32 is provided on the distribution path of the game ball discharged from the third opening, or a configuration in which the ball entry portion is not provided may be adopted. By doing so, it becomes more difficult for the player to guess how the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed. Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the distribution mode in the distribution mechanism 120.

B7-7. Modification 7:
The pachinko machine 10 in the above embodiment adopts a configuration in which the lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode when the probability variation jackpot is won, and the high-probability mode continues until the next jackpot is won. A configuration in which the number of times the game is executed may be limited may be adopted. By adopting such a configuration, for example, even if the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B are set when the 16R probability variation jackpot B is won, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are adopted. Since there is a limit to the number of game times that can be executed in the state of B (for example, 150 times), if the jackpot is not won by the time the limit is reached, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 7 gives the player a feeling of expectation to win the jackpot in the state of the high probability mode, and is disadvantageous when the jackpot is not won within the limited number of times. It is possible to give a sense of crisis such as a transition to a normal state, and it is possible to give an intonation to the player's expectation.

B7-8. Modification 8:
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot A, normal jackpot A) that is the high frequency support mode A is won among the jackpot types set in the distribution table for the first starting port, the jackpot is selected. A configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player has won. For example, it is set in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot has been won in the production of the game times when the jackpot in the high frequency support mode A is won. Then, the period of the open / close execution mode after the end of the game round in which the jackpot is won is set to an extremely short period, and the player is set to a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the open / close execution mode has been executed. Specifically, the number of round games (number of rounds) set for the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot A, normal jackpot A) that is the high frequency support mode A is reduced (for example, 2 rounds), and the round game Set the time to a very short time. Further, the effect in the open / close execution mode is also set in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize. By adopting such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player has shifted from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support A after winning a big hit. As a result, the game balls that reached the distribution mechanism 120 were alternately entered into the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b without the player noticing (low frequency support mode). It is possible to shift to a state in which the game ball that has reached the minute mechanism 120 alternately enters the first start port 33a and the second start port 34 (high frequency support mode A), thereby giving the player unexpectedness. At the same time, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

B7-9. Modification 9:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) are not held, but a configuration in which the passed game balls are held may be adopted ( The maximum number of reservations is 4). By doing so, in the case of the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) and reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53. A phenomenon is likely to occur in which the timing at which the normal electric accessory 53 is opened and the timing at which the normal electric accessory 53 is opened are likely to deviate from each other. It is possible to give the player more attention as to whether or not it is, and to give a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency.

B7-10. Modification 10:
The ordinary electric accessory 53 is not limited to the configurations of the above-described embodiment and the modified example, and other configurations can be adopted. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 53. As shown in the figure, when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in the closed state, the distribution surface 53s of the game ball in the plate-shaped movable piece 53a is in a state of being tilted so as to be parallel to the plane of the game board 30. When the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in the open state, the distribution surface 53s rotates so as to be substantially perpendicular to the plane of the game board 30, and the game ball can be distributed on the distribution surface 53s. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment and modification can be obtained.

B7-11. Modification 11:
In the second embodiment, a non-electric accessory may be provided instead of the ordinary electric accessory 53. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the non-electric accessory mechanically interlocked with the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined time. After the lapse of time, it will be closed. By doing so, the process can be simplified and the same effect as that of the second embodiment can be obtained.

C. Application to other configurations:
When a pachinko machine of another type different from each of the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a big hit when a right is generated, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

Further, a part of the functions realized by the software in the above embodiment may be realized by the hardware, or a part of the functions realized by the hardware may be realized by the software.

D. About the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications 1, 6, 8, and 10-12.

[Feature A1]
The game board that constitutes the game area where the game balls are distributed,
A rod-shaped member (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the distribution of the game ball, and
A reference portion (No. 1) provided on the game board so as to be parallel to the rod-shaped member when viewed from a predetermined direction (when viewed from the upper side to the lower side, when viewed from the right side to the left side). 1 The third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the entry port 33a of the starting port 33, the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633, the first mark 951, the second mark 952, and the mark 1051).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

The inclination of a rod-shaped member such as a nail that changes the distribution of a game ball may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. .. According to the feature A1, the inclination of the reference portion is set to be predetermined so as to match the inclination of the rod-shaped member intended by the manufacturer, so that the reference portion can be relied on when viewed from a predetermined direction. The inclination of the rod-shaped member can be confirmed and corrected so that the rod-shaped member is parallel to the reference portion. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the rod-shaped member without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the rod-shaped member or a dedicated adjusting tool.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine described in feature A1.
A ball entry port member (first start port 33) that forms an entry port (entry port 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
With
The rod-shaped member is a nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided above the ball entrance member.
The reference portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the reference portion is provided on the entrance member.

According to the feature A2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the reference portion provided on the ball entrance member. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine described in feature A2.
The reference portion is a gaming machine characterized by being an edge (third edge 333, fourth edge 334) of the ball entry port (ball entry port 33a).

According to the feature A3, since the inclination of the nail can be repaired without separately providing a dedicated member as a reference portion for the ball entrance member, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated. Can be done.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine described in feature A2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the reference portion is a mark (first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051) attached to the ball entrance member.

According to the feature A4, the visibility of the reference portion can be easily enhanced, and the certainty of repair can be enhanced.

<Characteristic B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and its modifications 1, 6, 8, and 10-12.

[Feature B1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
The game board that constitutes the game area where the game balls are distributed,
Nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the distribution of game balls, and
The angle between the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipment of the game machine is defined, which is different from the nail. The edge 334, the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633, the first mark 951, the second mark 952, the mark 1051), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

The inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of the game ball may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature B1, since the defining means defines the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, the angle defined by the defining means is determined by relying on the defining means. By checking and correcting the inclination of the nail, it is possible to correct the inclination of the nail at the time of shipment. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nail and a special adjusting tool.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine described in feature B1.
A ball entry port member (first starting port 33) provided below the nail and forming an entry port (entry port 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
With
The defining means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is provided on the entrance member.

According to the feature B2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the defining means provided in the ball entrance member. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine described in feature B2.
The defining means is a gaming machine characterized by being an edge (third edge 333, fourth edge 334) of the ball entry port (ball entry port 33a).

According to the feature B3, since the inclination of the nail can be repaired without separately providing a dedicated member as a defining means, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine described in feature B2.
The pachinko / pachislot machine is characterized in that the defining means is a mark (first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051) attached to the ball entrance member.

According to the feature B4, the visibility of the defining means can be easily enhanced, and the certainty of repair can be enhanced.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 9 of the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
The game board that constitutes the game area where the game balls are distributed,
Nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the distribution of game balls, and
An angle information specifying means (first numerical information Na, second numerical information Nb) indicating information about the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

The inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of the game ball may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature C1, the angle information specifying means indicates the information about the angle that matches the inclination of the nail intended by the manufacturer, so that the inclination of the nail is confirmed and corrected by relying on the angle information specifying means. can do. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nail and a special adjusting tool.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine described in feature C1.
A ball entry port member (first starting port 33) provided below the nail and forming an entry port (entry port 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
With
The angle information specifying means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is provided on the entrance member.

According to the feature C2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the angle information specifying means provided on the ball entrance member. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine described in feature C2.
As the nail, a first nail provided on one side in a predetermined direction and a second nail provided on the other side in the predetermined direction.
With
The ball entrance member is
Consists of at least the first and second parts,
The first part is provided with a first angle information specifying means for showing the angle information about the first nail.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second part is provided with a second angle information specifying means for indicating the angle information of the second nail.

According to the feature C3, since the ball entrance member is composed of at least the first part and the second part, the first part is provided with the first angle information specifying means at the time of manufacturing, and the second part is provided with the first angle information specifying means. It is possible to easily provide the second angle information specifying means. In particular, the first angle information explicit means and the second angle information explicit means have the same orientation so that both the first angle information explicit means and the second angle information explicit means can be seen from one side. Since one of the angle information specifying means is inside the ball entry port member, it is difficult to provide the angle information specifying means inside the ball entrance member at the time of manufacturing. Since the mouth member is composed of the first part and the second part, it is easy to manufacture.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modifications 5 of the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
The game board that constitutes the game area where the game balls are distributed,
Nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the distribution of game balls, and
Marks defining the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board (third edge 333 at the entry port 33a of the first starting port 33, fourth edge 334, upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633). , 1st mark 951, 2nd mark 952, mark 1051),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

The inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of the game ball may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature D1, since the mark defines the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board, the inclination of the nail is confirmed and corrected so as to be the angle specified by the mark, relying on the mark. As a result, the nail can be corrected to the degree of inclination intended by the manufacturer. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nail and a special adjusting tool.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine described in feature D1.
The mark defines the angle of the nail at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

According to the feature D2, the inclination of the nail can be easily returned to the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2.
A ball entry port member (first starting port 33) provided below the nail and forming an entry port (entry port 33a) into which a game ball can enter.
With
The mark is a gaming machine characterized in that it is provided on the entrance member.

According to the feature D3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the mark provided on the ball entrance member. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of feature D1 to feature D3.
When viewed from a predetermined direction (when viewed from the upper side to the lower side), the mark is parallel to the nail, and at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to confirm whether or not the inclination of the nail is the size intended by the manufacturer by confirming whether or not the nail is parallel to the mark when viewed from a predetermined direction. Moreover, when viewed from a predetermined direction, at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail, so that the mark is highly visible. Therefore, according to the feature D4, the inclination of the nail can be easily recognized, and the deviation of the inclination of the nail can be repaired more easily.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modifications 10 to 12 of the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
The game board that constitutes the game area where the game balls are distributed,
Nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the distribution of game balls, and
An entrance (opening 1400) where a game ball can enter,
Movable parts (movable pieces 1411a, 1411b, 1511a, 1511b, 1611a) provided at the ball entry port and capable of switching between a closed state and an open state in order to change the ease of entering the ball into the ball entry port. Movable means (electric accessories 1410, 1510) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The movable part is
A gaming machine having a predetermined portion (Sa, Sb, Ha, Hb, Ta) that defines an angle formed by the nail and the surface of the gaming board.

The inclination of the nail that changes the distribution of the game ball may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature E1, since the predetermined portion in the movable portion defines the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board, the inclination of the nail is determined so as to be the angle defined by the predetermined portion, relying on the predetermined portion. By checking and correcting, the nail can be corrected to the degree of inclination intended by the manufacturer. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nail and a special adjusting tool.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine described in feature E1.
The predetermined portion defines the angle with respect to the nail at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

According to the feature E2, the nail can be easily repaired according to the inclination of the gaming machine at the time of shipment.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the movable means, when the movable portion is in a closed state, the predetermined portion of the movable portion defines the angle.

According to the feature E3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and repaired so as to have an angle defined by the predetermined portion, relying on the predetermined portion of the movable portion in the closed state.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the movable means, when the movable portion is in an open state, the predetermined portion of the movable portion defines the angle.

According to the feature E4, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and repaired by relying on the predetermined portion of the movable portion in the open state. In particular, a nail close to the position of the movable portion in the open state can be the target of repair, and the nail can be easily repaired.

<Characteristic F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the variants 7 of the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
The game board that constitutes the game area where the game balls are distributed,
It is guaranteed that the game board is installed at a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board, and the reference portions (first mark 1151, second mark 1152) provided on the game board are
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine, ancillary objects such as nails are installed on the gaming board. According to the feature D1, the inclination of the accessory can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the reference portion guaranteed to have a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to easily and accurately repair the deviation of the inclination of the ancillary object without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the inclination of the ancillary object or a special adjusting tool.

[Feature F2]
Feature The gaming machine described in F1.
Nails provided on the surface of the game board to change the distribution of game balls (first nail 42a, second nail 42b)
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the angle guaranteed by the reference unit is a right angle.

According to the feature F2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the reference portion that is guaranteed to be installed perpendicular to the surface of the game board. The nails are provided at the inclination intended by the manufacturer, but according to feature D2, it is easy to incline the nails by comparing the orientation of the nail with the reference part that is guaranteed to be installed vertically. Can be confirmed in. Therefore, the inclination of the nail can be easily adjusted.

<Characteristic G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature G1]
A first-class ball-entry means (first starting port in the second embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol, and
Type 2 ball entry means (second starting port in the second embodiment) in which the entry of the game ball triggers the change of the second symbol, and
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the number of the game balls entering the first-class ball-entry means and the game balls to the second-class ball-entry means per unit time. A control means for controlling the relative ratio of the ball to the number of balls, which is the relative ratio of the ball to the number of balls, in at least three stages.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, when the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the number of game balls entering the first-class ball-entry means and the second-class ball-entry means per unit time. Since the relative ratio of the game balls to the number of balls entered into the game can be changed to at least three stages, it is possible to create a new flow of various games by combining the relative ratios of the three stages of entering balls. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine described in the feature G1.
A detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position,
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric service open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, and
When the predetermined lottery is won, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) that assists the entry of the game ball into the second type entry means and the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53).
With
The control means
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability.
The lottery execution time from the start of the predetermined lottery to the output of the lottery result is set to at least two stages of the first lottery execution time and the second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. Can be changed
The auxiliary time, which is the time for the auxiliary means to assist in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is the first auxiliary time and the second auxiliary time longer than the first auxiliary time. It can be changed in at least two stages,
As the control mode, the first control mode (low frequency support mode), the second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and the third control mode (high frequency support mode B) can be executed.
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time.
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time.
The third control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.
A gaming machine characterized in that the relative ratio of incoming balls is changed by switching the control mode.

According to the feature G2, the control means changes the ball entry relative ratio by switching three control modes in which the predetermined lottery winning probability, the lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time are different, so that the control is relatively simple. It is possible to switch the relative ratio of incoming balls.

<Characteristic H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature H1]
A first-class ball-entry means (first starting port in the second embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol, and
A type 2 ball entry means (first starting port in the second embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the second symbol, and
A distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) that alternately distributes the reached game ball to the first path (left side flow path R1) and the second path (right side flow path R2).
A first detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed the first detection position, which is a predetermined position on the second path, and
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric service open lottery) when the first detection means detects the passage of the game ball, and
When the predetermined lottery is won, an auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for guiding the reached game ball in a predetermined distribution direction, and
With
The first-class ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball distributed to the first path can enter.
The auxiliary means is arranged at a position where the game ball distributed to the second path can be reached.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second-class ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball whose distribution direction is guided by the auxiliary means can enter.

According to the feature H1, among the game balls that have reached the distribution means, the game balls distributed to the first path enter the first-class ball entry means, and the game balls distributed to the second path. Of these, the game ball assisted by the auxiliary means enters the second type ball entry means. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed in a distribution mode that reaches the distribution means, the frequency of the game balls entering the first-class ball entry means is determined by changing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery. It is possible to change the frequency of entering the game ball into the second-class ball entry means while keeping it constant within the range.

[Feature H2]
Feature The gaming machine described in H1.
A second detecting means (through gate 35b) for detecting that the passage has passed through a position where the sorting means is provided and a second detection position which is a position different from the first detection position is provided.
The lottery executing means executes the predetermined lottery (electric service open lottery) when the second detecting means detects the passage of the game ball.
The auxiliary means
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball that has passed the second detection position is arranged at a reachable position.

According to the feature H2, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position, the game is played only by the second type ball entry means. The ball can be put in. Therefore, by changing the distribution mode, it is possible to change the frequency of entering the first-class ball-entry means and the second-class ball-entry means.

<Feature I group>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature I1]
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33a in the second embodiment) in which the entry of the game ball triggers the change of the symbol, and
A second ball entry means (first starting port 33b in the second embodiment) in which the entry of the game ball triggers a change in the symbol, and
A distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for distributing the reached game ball to a plurality of routes,
A first guide path (left side flow path R1) for guiding the distributed game ball to the first ball entry means, and
A second guide path (right flow path R2) for guiding the distributed game ball to the second ball entry means, and
With
The symbol that fluctuates when the game ball enters the first ball-entry means and the symbol that fluctuates when the game ball enters the second ball-entry means are the same. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature I1, even though the game ball is sorted by the sorting means, even if the sorted game ball enters the first ball entry means, it enters the second ball entry means. Even when a ball is hit, the same symbol is changed in each case, so it is possible to give unexpectedness to the player who was supposed to change the different symbol for each ball entry means, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine described in feature I1.
A first symbol changing means that changes the first symbol when a game ball enters the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means.
A third ball entry means (second start port 34) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the design, and
A second symbol changing means that changes a second symbol, which is a symbol different from the first symbol, when a game ball enters the third entering means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I2, since the entry of the game ball is provided with the third entry means that triggers the variation of the second symbol, the player is expected to change the first symbol in addition to the expectation. , It is possible to give a feeling of expectation regarding the fluctuation of the second symbol. Further, it is possible to make the player make various guesses regarding the role of the distribution means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine described in Feature I2.
Auxiliary means that is arranged on a path through which a game ball circulates from the distribution means to the second ball entry means, and assists the game ball that circulates on the path to enter the third ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with (ordinary electric accessory 53).

According to the feature I3, since the auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the third entry means is provided on the path through which the game ball is distributed to the second entry means, the game ball sorted by the distribution means is provided. However, there are cases where the same symbol (first symbol) is changed regardless of whether it is distributed to the first guide route or the second guide route, or when the game ball allocated to the second guide route is distributed by the auxiliary means. It may be an opportunity to change the second symbol, and the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol can be made different depending on the operation pattern of the auxiliary means.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine described in feature I3.
A detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position on the second guide path is provided.
The auxiliary means
When the detection means detects the passage of the game ball, the game ball circulating on the route from the distribution means to the second ball entry means enters the third ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by assisting in doing so.

According to the feature I4, the auxiliary means has a third game ball that circulates on the path through which the game ball circulates from the distribution means to the second entry means when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball. Since it assists the player to enter the ball entry means, the player is urged to distribute the game ball to the second guide path, and when the game ball passes a predetermined position, the player feels an expectation. Can be given. Further, by encouraging the player to distribute the game ball to the second guide route, the player can concentrate on the game.

[Feature I5]
The gaming machine described in Feature I4.
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric service open lottery) when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball is provided.
The auxiliary means
When the predetermined lottery is won, the pachinko ball circulating on the route from the distribution means to the second ball entry means is assisted to enter the third ball entry means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature I5, when the detecting means wins a predetermined lottery executed when the detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, the auxiliary means moves on the route from the sorting means to the second ball entering means. Since it assists the game balls in circulation to enter the third ball entry means, the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol is controlled by controlling the winning probability in a predetermined lottery. Can be done.

[Feature I6]
The gaming machine according to feature I4 or feature I5.
When the detection means for detecting the passage of a predetermined position on the second guide path is the first detection means (through gate 35a),
A second detecting means (through gate 35b) different from the first detecting means for detecting passing through a specific position different from the position on the path distributed by the sorting means is provided.
The auxiliary means
When the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball, the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means is assisted in entering the third ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature I6, in the auxiliary means, when the second detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detecting means enters the third entering means. Since it assists the ball, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the third ball entry means via the second detection means without passing through the distribution means. As a result, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be entered only into the third entry means with a high probability.

[Feature I7]
The gaming machine described in Feature I6.
The lottery execution means is
When the second detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, the predetermined lottery is executed.
The auxiliary means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a predetermined lottery is won, a gaming ball whose passage is detected by the second detecting means assists the gaming ball to enter the third entering means.

According to the feature I7, when the auxiliary means wins a predetermined lottery executed when the second detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, the passage is detected by the second detecting means. Since it assists the game ball to enter the third ball entry means, the game ball is allowed to enter the third ball entry means via the second detection means without passing through the distribution means. Is possible. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed so that the player reaches the distribution means after lowering the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the game is played in the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. Since it is unlikely that the ball will enter and the game ball will enter the third entry means, only the first symbol can be changed with high probability. In addition, when the game balls are distributed so that the player reaches the distribution means after increasing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the first ball entry means, the second ball entry means, and A game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed. Further, when the player distributes the game balls so that the second detecting means detects the passage of the game balls after increasing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the game balls reach the sorting means. Since the probability is low and the game ball has a high probability of entering the third ball entry means via the second detection means and the auxiliary means, only the second symbol can be changed with a high probability. Therefore, there are at least three states: a gaming state in which only the first symbol fluctuates with a high probability, a gaming state in which only the first symbol and the second symbol fluctuate, and a gaming state in which only the second symbol fluctuates with a high probability. Can be created. As a result, it is possible to create a new game property by variously combining three game states in which the fluctuation ratios of the two symbols are different.

[Feature I8]
The gaming machine described in Feature I6.
A control means for controlling the gaming machine is provided.
The control means can execute a first control mode (low frequency support mode), a second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high frequency support mode B). ,
In the first control mode,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage is detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entry means by the assistance of the auxiliary means.
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means by the assistance of the auxiliary means.
In the second control mode,
It is possible or easy for the game ball whose passage is detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means.
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means by the assistance of the auxiliary means.
In the third control mode,
It is possible or easy for the game ball whose passage is detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball whose passage is detected by the second detecting means can or easily enters the third entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means.

According to the feature I8, the control means can execute three control modes in which the difficulty level (difficulty / ease) of entering the game ball into the third entry means is different. Switching can be used to create a variety of new game flows.

[Feature I9]
The gaming machine described in Feature I8.
The control means
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability.
The lottery execution time (variable time of the electric service open lottery) from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result is the first lottery execution time and the second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. It can be changed in at least two stages with time,
The auxiliary time, which is the time for the auxiliary means to assist in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is the first auxiliary time and the second auxiliary time longer than the first auxiliary time. It can be changed in at least two stages,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time.
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time.
The third control mode is
A gaming machine characterized in that the winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

According to the feature I9, the difficulty level (difficulty / ease) of entering the game ball into the third entry means by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time. ) Can be executed in three different control modes, so that it is possible to realize the creation of various new game flows using the switching of the control modes by relatively easy control.

<Characteristic J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature J1]
A predetermined ball entry means (second starting port 34 in the second embodiment) through which a game ball can enter, and
A detection means (through gate 35a) that detects that the game ball has passed a specific position, and
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric service open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, and
When the predetermined lottery is won, an auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means and
A distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for distributing the reached game ball to a plurality of routes,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The detection means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged on one of the plurality of paths (right side flow path R2).

According to the feature J1, the detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball, which triggers the execution of a predetermined lottery as to whether or not the auxiliary means assists the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, is provided by the distribution means. Since it is arranged on one of a plurality of routes to be distributed, it is possible to draw attention to the player regarding the mode of distribution of the game balls by the distribution means.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine described in Feature J1.
The first ball entry means (first starting port 33b) arranged at a position where the game ball distributed to the one path by the distribution means can enter the ball when it is not assisted by the auxiliary means. Prepare,
The ball entry means into which the game ball enters when assisted by the auxiliary means is a second ball entry means (second starting port 34) different from the first ball entry means. A game machine to play.

According to the feature J2, since the first ball entering means is arranged at the position where the game ball distributed to one path by the sorting means can be entered when it is not assisted by the auxiliary means, it is shaken. In addition to giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the mode of distribution of the game balls by the division means, if the game balls are distributed in one route, does the game ball enter the first entry means, or It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the ball will enter the second ball entry means by the assistance of the auxiliary means, and give at least two levels of expectation regarding the outcome of the game ball that has reached the distribution means. be able to.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2.
A third ball entry means (first starting port 33a) arranged at a position where a game ball distributed to a path different from the one path (left flow path R1) by the distribution means can enter.
A first symbol changing means that changes the first symbol when a game ball enters the first ball entering means and the third ball entering means, and a first symbol changing means.
A second symbol changing means that changes the second symbol when a game ball enters the second entering means, and a second symbol changing means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J3, even if the distributed game ball enters the first ball entry means even though the game ball is distributed by the distribution means, the ball enters the third ball entry means. In this case, the first symbol, which is the same symbol, is changed in each case. It is possible to give unexpectedness to a player who is presumed to be a gaming machine having a different configuration, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic K group>
[Feature K1]
A first distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) that alternately distributes the reached game ball to the first path (left side flow path R1 in the second embodiment) and the second path (right side flow path R2).
A second distribution means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for distributing the game ball circulating in the second path into the third path and the fourth path, and
Type 1 ball entry means (first start port), in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol,
Type 2 ball entry means (second start port) where the entry of the game ball triggers the change of the second symbol,
With
The first-class ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball that has circulated through the first path and the third path can enter.
The second-class ball-entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball circulated through the fourth route can enter.
The second distribution means is a gaming machine characterized in that the probability of distributing a game ball to the fourth path is controllably controllable.

According to the feature K1, since the game is provided with two distribution means and the probability that the second distribution means distributes the game ball to the fourth path can be changed, the game reached by the first distribution means. Even when the ball is alternately distributed to the first path and the second path, the probability that the second distribution means distributes the game ball to the fourth path is changed to obtain the first symbol. The fluctuating ratio with the second symbol can be changed. For example, when the probability that the second distribution means distributes the game ball to the fourth path is set low, the game ball distributed to the first path by the first distribution means is set to the first type ball entry means. The ball is made to enter the ball, and the first symbol is changed. On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the second path can be distributed to the third route with a high probability by the second distribution means and entered into the first type ball entry means, and the first symbol can be changed. .. That is, the game ball that has reached the first distribution means can be entered into the first-class ball entry means with a high probability, and the first symbol can be changed. Further, when the second distribution means sets a high probability of distributing the game ball to the fourth path, the game ball distributed to the first path by the first distribution means is set to the first type ball entry means. The ball is made to enter the ball, and the first symbol is changed. On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the second path can be distributed to the fourth route with a high probability by the second distribution means and entered into the second type ball entry means, and the second symbol can be changed. .. In this way, by changing the probability that the second distribution means distributes the game ball to the fourth path, the fluctuating ratio between the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed.

[Feature K2]
Feature The gaming machine described in K1.
The second distribution means (ordinary electric accessory 53) passes through the first distribution means in a mode (open state) in which the game balls circulating in the second path are distributed to the fourth path. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a guiding means for guiding a gaming ball that is distributed without a game to the second-class ball entering means.

According to the feature K2, in the embodiment in which the game ball circulating in the second path is distributed to the fourth path, the guide for guiding the game ball circulating without passing through the first sorting means to the second type entering means. Provide means. Therefore, by distributing the game ball to the second distribution means, which is a mode of distribution to the fourth path, in a distribution mode in which the game ball is reached without passing through the first distribution means, the game ball enters the second type. The probability of entering the means can be increased, and the rate at which the second symbol fluctuates can be increased as the fluctuating ratio between the first symbol and the second symbol.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2.
A detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position on the second path, and
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric service open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, and
With
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery, the second distribution means determines whether the game ball circulating in the second route is distributed to the third route or the fourth route. A gaming machine characterized by doing.

According to the feature K3, the second distribution means determines whether to distribute the game ball circulating in the second route to the third route or the fourth route based on the result of a predetermined lottery. Since the determination is made, the player cannot recognize in advance whether the game ball circulating in the second route is distributed to the third route or the fourth route. Therefore, the player is made to guess the result of the predetermined lottery and whether the game ball circulating in the second route is distributed to the third route or the fourth route, and is expected. Can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic L group>
[Feature L1]
A first ball entry means (second starting port 34 in the second embodiment) through which a game ball can enter, and
A detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position,
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric service open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, and
When the predetermined lottery is won, an auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the first entry means and
Control means for controlling the gaming machine and
With
The control means
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability.
The lottery execution time (variable time of the electric service open lottery) from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result is the first lottery execution time and the second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. It can be changed in at least two stages with time,
The auxiliary time, which is the time for the auxiliary means to assist in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is the first auxiliary time and the second auxiliary time longer than the first auxiliary time. It can be changed in at least two stages,
As the control mode, the first control mode (low frequency support mode), the second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and the third control mode (high frequency support mode B) can be executed.
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time.
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time.
The third control mode is
A gaming machine characterized in that the winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

According to the feature L1, the control means can switch between three control modes in which the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time are different. It is possible to create various game flows.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine described in feature L1.
A second ball entry means (first starting port), which is a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first ball entry means.
A first distribution means for alternately distributing the reached game ball to the first path (left side flow path R1) and the second path (right side flow path R2).
With
The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball circulating through the first path and the second path can enter.
The detection means detects that the game ball has passed the predetermined position on the second path, and detects that the game ball has passed.
The auxiliary means is a gaming machine characterized in that the auxiliary means is arranged on a path through which a game ball is distributed from the second path to the second entry means.

According to the feature L2, although the distribution means alternately distributes the game ball to the first path and the second path, the second ball entry means takes the first path and the second path. Since the distributed game balls are arranged at positions where they can enter, it is possible to make the player make various guesses about the purpose of installing the distribution means and to give unexpectedness. Further, since the auxiliary means assists the game ball distributed to the second path to enter the first ball entry means, the game ball distributed to the second path by the distribution means is assisted by the auxiliary means. It is possible to draw attention to the player as to whether or not it is assisted, and to give a sense of expectation.

<Characteristic M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature M1]
A ball entry means (second starting port 34 in the second embodiment) through which a game ball can enter, and
A distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for distributing the reached game ball to a plurality of routes,
A first detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the first detection position, which is a position on one of the plurality of routes, has been passed, and
A second detecting means (through gate 35b) for detecting that the passage has passed through a position where the sorting means is provided and a second detection position which is a position different from the first detection position.
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric service open lottery) and
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
With
The lottery execution means is
When the first detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, the predetermined lottery is executed.
When the second detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, the predetermined lottery is executed.
A lottery mode in which the lottery execution time from the time when the first detecting means or the second detecting means detects the passage of the game ball to the time when the predetermined lottery is started and the lottery result is output is Tp. Prepare,
The auxiliary means
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball that has passed the first detection position is assisted to enter the ball entry means.
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball that has passed the second detection position is assisted to enter the ball entry means.
When the predetermined lottery is won, the time from the time when the lottery result is output to the time when the auxiliary means becomes in the assistable state is Tm.
When the assistance is provided in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, the assistance mode in which the assistance time is the first assistance time Ts1 and the assistance time is the first assistance time. It has an auxiliary mode with a second auxiliary time Ts2 longer than Ts1.
The time from the time when the game ball passes the first detection position to the time when it reaches the auxiliary means is Tr1, and the time from the time when the game ball passes the second detection position to the time when it reaches the auxiliary means is Let's call it Tr2
The time from the time when the game ball passing through the first detection position reaches the auxiliary means to the time when the game ball enters the ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means is Tf1, and the game ball passing through the second detection position is Tf1. When the time from the time when the assisting means is reached to the time when the ball enters the ball entering means by the assistance of the assisting means is set to Tf2.
Tp + Tm ≤ Tr1
Tp + Tm ≤ Tr2
Tr1 + Tf1 ≤ Tp + Tm + Ts1 <Tr2 + Tf2 ≤ Tp + Tm + Ts2
A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature M1, the auxiliary means includes an auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1 and an auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2. In the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the first detection position, that is, the game balls are distributed so as to reach the distribution means. In that case, the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means by the assistance of the auxiliary means, but when the game ball is distributed so as to pass through the second detection position, the game ball enters the ball entry means. Since the assistance by the auxiliary means ends before the ball enters the ball, the game ball cannot be entered into the ball entry means. Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of the game ball which is advantageous for the player, in the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, the first detection position is passed (reaches the distribution means). The distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed is more advantageous for the player than the distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the second detection position.

On the other hand, in the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, the game ball is distributed so as to pass through the first detection position, and the game ball passes through the second detection position. In any case of distribution to the ball, the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means by the assistance of the auxiliary means. However, when the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the first detection position, the game balls pass through the distribution means, so only the game balls distributed to one path among the game balls that have reached the distribution means. It cannot pass through the first detection position. Therefore, the ratio of the number of game balls that pass through the first detection position to the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means and enter the ball entry means when the game balls are distributed so as to reach the distribution means. Is a game ball that passes through the second detection position and enters the ball entry means with respect to the number of game balls that have reached the second detection position when the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the second detection position. It is lower than the ratio of the number. Therefore, when considering a distribution mode of the game ball that is advantageous to the player, in the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, the distribution mode is such that the game ball passes through the second detection position. Is a distribution mode of the game balls that is more advantageous for the player than a distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the first detection position (to reach the distribution means).

Therefore, by switching the auxiliary mode by the auxiliary means, it is possible to change the distribution mode of the game ball which is advantageous for the player in the distribution mode in which the game ball is entered into the ball entry means by the assistance by the auxiliary means. It is possible to create a new game property, and further, it is possible to have the player actively participate in the operation of changing the distribution mode of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) that alternately distributes the reached game ball to the first guide path (left side flow path R1 in the modified example 5 of the second embodiment) and the second guide path (right side flow path R2). )When,
A ball entry portion (first starting port 33a in the modified example 5 of the second embodiment) into which a game ball can enter, and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the first guide path and the second guide path both guide a game ball to the same ball entry portion.

According to the feature N1, although the game balls are distributed by the distribution means, the game balls distributed to the first guide path and the game balls distributed to the second guide path are the same. Since the player is guided to the ball entry portion of the ball, the player can make various guesses about the purpose of installing the sorting means and can give unexpectedness.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine described in feature N1.
When the ball-entry portion guided by both the first guide path and the second guide path is used as the first ball-entry portion, the ball-entry portion through which the game ball can enter is the first. A second ball entry part (second start port 34) different from the ball entry part of 1 and
A first detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed the first detection position, which is a predetermined position on the second guide path, and
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when the first detection means detects the passage of the game ball, and
An auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) arranged on a path through which a game ball circulates from the second guide path to the first entry portion, and when the predetermined lottery is won, the said. Auxiliary means for assisting the game ball that has reached the auxiliary means to enter the second ball entry portion, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature N2, a part of the game ball distributed to the second guide path can be made to enter the second entry portion. Therefore, by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first entry section and the number of game balls entering the second entry section is controlled. be able to.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine described in Feature N2.
A second detecting means (through gate 35b) for detecting that the passage has passed through a position where the sorting means is provided and a second detection position which is a position different from the first detection position is provided.
The lottery executing means executes the predetermined lottery when the second detecting means detects the passage of the game ball.
The auxiliary means
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball that has passed the second detection position is arranged at a reachable position.

According to the feature N3, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position, the game is played only in the second ball entry portion. The ball can be put in.

<Characteristic O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature O1]
The distribution area where game balls are distributed and
A distribution route changing means (ordinary electric accessory 53 in the third modification of the second embodiment) that is arranged in the distribution area and changes the distribution route through which the game ball can be distributed.
With
The distribution channel changing means is
In the first state (closed state), the first distribution path (the path from the right flow path R2 to the second starting port 34) through which the game ball can be distributed is blocked, and the game ball can be distributed. Divide the distribution route of 2 (the route from the wall W to the second starting port 34),
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second state (open state), the shield of the first distribution route is released and the second distribution route is formed.

According to the feature O1, the distribution channel changing means can change the two distribution channels by shifting from the first state to the second state. That is, the distribution route changing means can change the states of two types of distribution channels at the same time by changing one state. As a result, in either case of distributing the game ball to the first distribution channel or distributing the game ball to the second distribution channel, it is possible to execute the game using the distribution route changing means. ..

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine described in feature O1.
Equipped with a lottery execution means to execute a predetermined lottery (electric service open lottery)
The distribution channel changing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that when the predetermined lottery is won, the first state is changed to the second state.

According to the feature O2, the distribution channel changing means shifts from the first state to the second state when the predetermined lottery is won, so that the player is given a sense of expectation about the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. can do. Further, by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, it is possible to control the probability and frequency of changing the first distribution channel and the second distribution channel.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine described in feature O2,
A first detecting means (through gate) for detecting that a game ball has passed a first position on the first distribution route and on the upstream side of the distribution direction of the game ball with respect to the distribution route changing means. 35a) and
A second detecting means (through gate) for detecting that the game ball has passed a second position on the second distribution route and on the upstream side of the distribution direction of the game ball with respect to the distribution route changing means. With 35b)
The lottery execution means is
When the first detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, the predetermined lottery is executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined lottery is executed when the second detecting means detects the passage of the gaming ball.

According to the feature O3, since a predetermined lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the first position or the second position, various game characteristics can be created by utilizing the property. For example, depending on the state of the game, it is controlled so that it is advantageous for the player to pass the game ball to the first position, or it is better to let the game ball pass to the second position. By controlling the game so as to be advantageous to the player, the player can be made to have a game property that encourages the player to change the distribution mode of the game ball, and can be encouraged to actively participate in the game.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine described in feature O3.
The distribution channel changing means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, the first distribution of the game balls that have passed through the first position and the game balls that triggered the winning are released from the shield by the distribution route changing means. A gaming machine characterized in that it shifts from the first state to the second state at a timing when a route can be distributed.

According to the feature O4, the game ball is passed to the first position, a predetermined lottery is won, the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state, and the shield of the first distribution route is released. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress an event in which the game ball cannot be distributed to the first distribution channel during the period when the shield is released, which lowers the expectation of the player.

[Feature O5]
The gaming machine according to feature O3 or feature O4.
The distribution channel changing means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball that has passed through the second position and triggered the winning passes through the second distribution channel formed by the distribution route changing means. A gaming machine characterized in that it shifts from the first state to the second state at a timing when it can be distributed.

According to the feature O5, the game ball is passed to the second position, the predetermined lottery is won, the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state, and the second distribution route is formed. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress an event in which the game ball cannot be distributed to the second distribution channel during the period when the second distribution channel is formed, which lowers the expectation of the player.

[Feature O6]
The gaming machines described in features O1 to O5.
It is arranged at a specific position in the distribution area and is provided with a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball.
The specific position
On the first distribution route and on the downstream side of the distribution direction of the game ball from the distribution route changing means, and on the second distribution route and from the distribution route changing means. Is also a gaming machine characterized in that it is located on the downstream side of the distribution direction of the gaming ball.

According to the feature O6, it is on the first distribution route and is located downstream of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball, and is on the second distribution route to change the distribution route. Since the ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the distribution direction of the game ball from the means, when the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state, the game ball is used as the ball entry means. There is a high possibility that the ball will enter, and the player's expectation can be raised.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature P1]
A first-class ball-entry means (first starting port 33b in the second embodiment) in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol, and
A second-class ball-entry means (second starting port 34) that triggers a change in the second symbol in which the entry of the game ball is different from the first symbol.
When the game ball that has arrived is a distribution means (ordinary electric accessory 53) and does not operate, the game ball that circulates at a predetermined position is inserted into the first-class ball entry means and operates. , A distribution means for causing a game ball circulating at the predetermined position to enter the second type ball entry means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature P1, the ball entering means for entering the ball after the game ball reaching the sorting means is sorted differs depending on whether or not the sorting means operates, and the fluctuating symbol is different. , It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the sorting means works.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine described in feature P1.
A detection means (through gate 35a) that detects that the game ball has passed a specific position, and
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric service open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, and
With
The distribution means is a gaming machine that operates when the predetermined lottery is won.

According to the feature P2, since the sorting means operates when a predetermined lottery is won, it is possible to control the frequency with which the sorting means operates by controlling the winning probability in the predetermined lottery. As a result, it is possible to control the rate at which the first symbol and the second symbol are changed.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine described in feature P2.
The specific position is a game machine characterized in that the game ball that has passed through the specific position is a position that can reach the distribution means.

According to the feature P3, since the specific position is the position where the game ball passing through the specific position can reach the distribution means, it is specific to the player who has a feeling of expectation for the operation of the distribution means. It is also possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the position. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball passes through a specific position, and then pay attention to how the game ball passing through the specific position is distributed by the distribution means, and the game ball is distributed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation step by step with respect to the mode to be performed.

The inventions of the feature A group to the feature P group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, there are various structures, controls, productions, etc. for the purpose of improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, etc. Technical improvements have been made from the perspective.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as finding and deterring illegal acts by the player and unauthorized modification of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, providing a sounder game, and the like. It is rare.

It should be noted that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature P group are appropriately combined may be adopted. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a start-in ball provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area. A game including a unit, an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the starting ball entry unit, and an acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means. Machine.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Operation of a symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols, a start means for starting the variable display of the plurality of symbols due to an operation of the start operation means, and an operation of a stop operation means. A gaming machine including a stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols due to the above or due to the passage of a predetermined time, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations within a range not deviating from the gist thereof. For example, the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in each of the embodiments described in the column of the outline of the invention, the technical features in the modified examples are used to solve some or all of the above-mentioned problems, or the above-mentioned above. It is possible to replace or combine them as appropriate to achieve some or all of the effects. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 30 ... Game board 31 ... Guidance rail 31a ... Inner rail part 31b ... Outer rail part 32 ... General entry port 33 ... 1st start port 34 ... 2nd start port 34a ... Electric accessory 34b ... Electric accessory drive 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening and closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive 37 ... Special figure unit 37a ... 1st symbol display unit 37b ... 2nd symbol display unit 37c ... 1st hold display unit 37d ... 2nd hold display unit 38 ... Normal diagram unit 39 ... Round display unit 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Liquid crystal display device 41a ... Display surface 41aL ... Display area 41aS ... Display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 45 ... Main display 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 ... 1st control unit 52 ... 2nd control unit 53 ... 3rd control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main control device 61 ... Main control board 63a ... Win / fail table storage area 63b ... Sorting table storage area 63c ... Reach determination table storage area 63d ... Fluctuation time table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f ... Command information storage area 64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Hold information storage area 64c ... Electric service hold area 64d ... Various counter areas 64e ... Various flag storage areas 64f ... Various detection processing result storage areas 67a ... Various detection sensors 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81. .. Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Voice emission control device 91 ... Voice emission control board 92 ... MPU
93 ... ROM
93a ... Production pattern table storage area 93b ... Variable display pattern table storage area 94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
533, 633, 733, 833, 933, 1033, 1233, 1333 ... 1st starting port 1410, 1510 ... Electric accessory

Claims (2)

Type 1 ball entry means, in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the first symbol,
Type 2 ball entry means, in which the entry of a game ball triggers a change in the second symbol,
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the number of the game balls entering the first-class ball-entry means and the game balls to the second-class ball-entry means per unit time. A control means for controlling the relative ratio of the ball to the number of balls, which is the relative ratio of the ball to the number of balls, in at least three stages.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
A detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position,
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, and
When the predetermined lottery is won, the auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second type entry means and the auxiliary means.
With
The control means
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery executing means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability.
The lottery execution time from the start of the predetermined lottery to the output of the lottery result is set to at least two stages of the first lottery execution time and the second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. Can be changed
The auxiliary time, which is the time for the auxiliary means to assist in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is the first auxiliary time and the second auxiliary time longer than the first auxiliary time. It can be changed in at least two stages,
As the control mode, the first control mode, the second control mode, and the third control mode can be executed.
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time.
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time.
The third control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.
A gaming machine characterized in that the relative ratio of incoming balls is changed by switching the control mode.

Images